Home

Accton Technology VS4512 User's Manual

1. Command Function Mode Pag e management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4 26 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a PE 4 27 browser management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the Web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager e IP address can be configured for SNMP Web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges e When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP Web or Telnet the switch w
2. Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 41 logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4 41 logging sendmai Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 4 42 source email logging sendmai Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 42 destination email logging sendmai Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 43 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 4 43 4 40 System Management Commands logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server e To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fai
3. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 42 PY TTTIYTIIIT VS 4612 Unit 1 M N R Mode Active E Link Up F Link Down Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Menu Description Page System 3 7 System Information Provides basic system description including contact information 3 7 Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 3 9 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 10 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 11 Fan Status Displays the status of the switch fans 3 14 Firmware Manages code image files 3 14 Configuration Manages switch configuration files 3 16 Reset Restarts the switch 3 18 Configuring the Switch Menu Description Page SNTP 3 18 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or a 3 18 specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 19 SNMP 3 20 Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3 21 IP Filtering Sets IP addresses of clients al
4. 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Ethl 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Configuring Private VLANs pvian Use this command in global configuration mode to enable or configure private VLAN Use the no form of this command to disable it Command Function Mode Pag e pvlan Enables Private VLAN globally for the switch GC 4 144 pvlan up link down link Configures uplink and downlink ports GC 4 144 show pvlan shows the private VLAN configuration settings on this PE 4 145 switch Syntax pvlan pvlan up link interface list down link interface list no pvian e up link Specifies a list of uplink interfaces e down link Specifies a list of downlink interfaces Default Setting No pvlan Command Mode Global configuration 4 144 Configuring Private VLANs Command Usage A Private VLAN allows modification of the default VLAN to provide port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Example This example globally enables private vlan and then configures ports 13 and 14 as uplink ports and ports 1 8 as downlink ports Console config pvlan Console config Console config pvla
5. To add new VLAN members at a later time you can manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command or turn off port security to re enable the learning function long enough for new VLAN members to be registered Learning may then be disabled again if desired for security A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port e Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port e If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command 4 67 Command Line Interface Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 89 mac address table static 4 122 show mac address table 4 123 802 1x Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1x dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Command Function Mode Page authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type
6. dot1x operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count count no dot1x operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port e multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 20 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 70 Authentication Commands Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenticate interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dot1x re authenticate Console dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Global Conf
7. IP Interface Commands There are no IP addresses assigned to this switch by default You must manually configure a new address to manage the switch over your network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration Command Function Mod Pag e e ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 167 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC 4 168 other subnetworks show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 168 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4 169 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the NE 4 169 network PE 4 166 IP Interface Commands ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address ip address P address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting IP address 0 0 0 0 Netmask 255 0 0 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration
8. reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y 4 20 General Commands end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 21 Command Line Inte
9. 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 Nl OD oy AJ wl N gt Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces 4 154 Priority Commands Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip port Global Configuration Use this command to enable IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax map ip port no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config map ip port Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP port priority i e TCP UDP
10. Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs 4 130 Spanning Tree Commands Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 e Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore l
11. Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message e Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result e Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designate
12. Start ip address End ip address ds GODS 16 8581 519 192 168 1 19 2 2 192168 e 25 192 168 1 30 Console 4 27 Command Line Interface Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Pag e ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the Web browser interface GC 4 28 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4 28 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted communications GC 4 29 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS SSL GC 4 30 ip telnet server Enables Telnet access to the switch GC 4 30 ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 28 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled 4 28 System Management Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 28 ip
13. for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the VDSL 4Band Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is assigned by DHCP by default Basic Configuration Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network admin
14. queue_id The ID of the priority queue e Ranges are 0 to 4 where 4 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port e This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 0123 4 Priority Queue 0 12 1 2 5 166 7 223 Related Commands show queue cos map 4 151 4 150 Priority Commands show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command M
15. Enable Authentication Traps iv Enable Link up and Link down Traps V Ei CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 19 private version 2c 4 78 Console config snmp server enable traps 4 79 3 22 Simple Network Management Protocol Filtering Addresses for SNMP Client Access The switch allows you to create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed access to the switch via SNMP management software Command Usage To specify the clients allowed SNMP access enter an IP address along with a subnet mask to identify a specific host or a range of valid addresses For example IP address 192 168 1 1 and mask 255 255 255 255 Specifies a valid IP address of 192 168 1 1 for a single client IP address 192 168 1 1 and mask 255 255 255 0 Specifies a valid IP address group from 192 168 1 0 to 192 168 1 254 IP filtering only restricts management access for clients running SNMP management software such as HP OpenView It does not affect management access to the switch using the web interface or Telnet The default setting is null which allows all IP groups SNMP access to the switch If one or more IP addresses are configured IP filtering is enabled and only addresses listed in this table will have SNMP access Command Attributes IP Filter List Displays a list of the IP address subne
16. Line Performance Date Information Since the unit was last reset During this 15 Min interval During this 1 Day interval E FP B7 Loss ofFrame O oss of Signal OO Loss of Power Loss of Link Errored Second Unavailable Second a S S alid Intervals ooo a Invalid meras FO Channel Performance Data Information Since the unit was last reset During this 15 Min interval Ouring this 1 Day interval ee A urent Tine Elapsed Curent Fixed Octet O B o E rent Bad Block e T E nent Valdintenal a S e S S 3 70 VDSL Configuration CLI Use the show controllers efm current performance command Example Console show controllers efm current performance vtu c 1 1 4 120 VDSL_PERF DATA ENTRY Ethernet 1 Loss of Framing 0 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Signal 0 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Power 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Link 0 Ethernet 1 Errored Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 Severely Errored Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 Unavailable Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 Line Initialization Attempts 0 Ethernet 1 Elapsed Seconds at interval 15 minutes 61 Ethernet 1 Loss of Framing at inteval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Signal at interval 15 minutes o Ethernet 1 Loss of Power at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Link at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 1 Errored Second at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Severely Errored Second at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Unavailable Second at interval 15 minut
17. Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and
18. onsole config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm rate adapt Console config if Related Commands rate limit 4 97 4 108 VDSL Commands efm pbo This command enables and disables power back off on the selected VDSL port Syntax no efm pbo Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage If PBO is enabled the power of transmission from the port will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port Example The following example enables power back off for port 1 onsole config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm pbo Console config if Related Commands show controllers efm status 4 114 show controllers ethernet controller Use this command to display the Ethernet link transmit and receive statistics for a specific VDSL port or for all the VDSL ports on the switch and the connected CPE Syntax show controllers ethernet controller interface id interface id ID of the VDSL port Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage Using this command without specifying a VDSL port displays the Ethernet link statistics of all ports on the switch and on the connected CPE devices The output shows the statistics collected by the VDSL chipset on the switch and the statistics collected by the VDSL chipset on the CPE 4 109 Command Line Interface E
19. Accton Making Partnership Work VDSL Switch VS4512 VDSL Switch VS4512DC Management Guide Accton Making Partnership Work Management Guide VDSL Switch V4512 VDSL Switch with AC power connector supporting 12 VDSL lines with 2 Slots for Optional OOOBASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE T or 1000BASE X GBIC uplink modules VDSL Switch VS4512DC VDSL Switch with DC power connector supporting 12 VDSL lines with 2 Slots for Optional TOOOBASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE T or 1000BASE X GBIC uplink modules Copyright 2003 by Accton Technology Corporation All rights reserved No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of Accton Technology Corporation Accton makes no warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability quality or fitness for any particular purpose The information in this document is subject to change without notice Accton reserves the right to make revisions to this publication without obligation to notify any person or entity of any such changes Accton International Headquarters Europe Headquarters No 1 Creation Road III Edificio Conata Il Science based Industrial Park Calle Fructu s Gelabert 6 8 2 42 Hsinchu 300 Taiwan 08970 Sant Joan Despi Phone 886 3 5770 270 Barcelona Spain Fax 886 3 5770 267 Phone 34 93 477 4920 Internet support accton com tw Fax 34 93 4
20. An address bitmask of decimal numbers that represent the address bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed access to the switch via SNMP management software e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four decimal integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore e If the IP is the address of a single management station the bitmask should be set to 255 255 255 255 Otherwise an IP address group is specified by the bitmask e The default setting is null which allows all IP groups SNMP access to the switch If one IP address is configured IP filtering is enabled and only addresses in the specified IP group will have SNMP access IP filtering does not affect management access to the switch using the Web interface or Telnet Example The following example enables SNMP IP filtering on the switch and allows SNMP management access to client IP 10 1 2 3 and client IP group 10 1 3 0 to 10 1 3 255 Console config snmp ip filter 10 1 2 3 255 255 255 255 Console config snmp ip filter 10 1 3 0 255 255 255 0 Console config Related Commands show snmp 4 81 4 80 SNMP Commands show snmp This command checks the status of SNMP communications Default Setting No
21. Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 3 40 Port Configuration 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled e LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled e Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 20 addresses Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected none shutdown trap trap and shutdown Combo forced mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 copper forced copper preferred auto SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current status e Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Port Operation Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down
22. Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port e Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1x Port Configuration Select the authentication mode from the drop down box and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Port Status Operation Mode on Mode Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized Yes 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 Enabled Mult Host z fio Force Authorized E 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized z 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized 00 00 00 00 00 00 zj 3 37 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets the authentication mode to enable 802 1x on port 2 and allows up to ten clients to connect to this port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 84 Console config if dot1lx port control auto 4 70 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 4 70 Console config if Displaying 802 1x Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Statistical Values Parameter Description Rx EXPOL St
23. Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result 4 127 Command Line Interface Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage
24. Event Logging Commands 4 35 show users 4 53 4 16 General Commands show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Vty configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 65535 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 18 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 18 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 19 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 19 reload Restarts the system PE 4 20 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 21 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 4 21 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 21 help Shows how to use help any NA 7 Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA 4 17 Command Line Interface enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands
25. Expansion Slot 1 not present Expansion Slot 2 not present Configuring the Switch CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version Unitl Serial number Service tag Hardware version Module A type snot present Module B type mot present Number of ports Main power status Redundant power status Agent master Unit id Loader version Boot rom version Operation code version 1 0 3 Console Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes e Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol e Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 98 Note that Traffic classes is always enabled in this switch it cannot be disabled Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 73 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database e Configurable PVI
26. Init Number of line initialization attempts in the indicated time interval This count includes both successful and failed attempts Channel Performance Data History Information Fixed Octet Number of corrected octets in the indicated time interval Bad Block Number of uncorrectable blocks in the indicated time interval VDSL Configuration Web Click VDSL Performance Monitor History VDSL Performance Monitor History Line 1 Chanel Slow Side Local z Query Line Performance Data History Information 15 Min interval 1 96 Interval Number 1 Monitor Seconds 0 0 1 atetea asses 5 Channel Performance Data History Information 15 Min Interval 1 Day Interval 1 96 1 3 Interval Number 1 1 Ie Note The parameters described above are not displayed in the CLI for periods before the current 15 minute or 24 hour interval To display these parameters during the current 15 minute or 24 hour period see VDSL Performance Monitor Information on page 3 69 Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific inte
27. PASS Done All Pass logy change notification Console 3 8 Basic Configuration Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports and expansion ports Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply This will display as not present since this switch has no redundant power supply CLI only Management Software e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code e Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master i e operating stand alone Expansion Slot Expansion Slot 1 2 Slots for extender modules Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number Number of Ports 12 Hardware Version internal Power Status Active Management Software Loader Version 2 0 0 2 Boot ROM Version 2 0 19 Operation Code Version 1 0 3 5 Role Master Expansion Slot
28. This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 128 Spanning Tree Commands Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priorit
29. e e config if negotiation e config if capabilities 100half e config if capabilities 100full e config if capabilities flowcontrol e config if exit Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure two Gigabit optional module ports as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take
30. no snmp server community string e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The first snmp server community command you enter enables SNMP SNMPv1 The no snmp server community command disables SNMP 4 76 SNMP Commands Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 77 snmp server location This command s
31. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Console show controllers efm channel table vtu c 1 1 VDSL_CHAN ENTRY Interleave Delay CRC Block Length Current Transmit Rate Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction oooo o 4 119 Command Line Interface show controllers efm current performance Use this command to display line and channel performance data information for the current 15 minute interval and for the current day Syntax show controllers efm current performance vtu r vtu c interface vtu r VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the remote end of the line e vtu c VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the near central end of the line e interface Ethernet interface to display e unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged EXEC 4 120 Example Console show controllers efm current performance vtu c 1 1 VDSL_PERF DATA ENTRY Ethernet 1 Loss of Framing 0 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Signal 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Power 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Link 0 Ethernet 1 Errored Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 Severely Errored Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 Unavailable Seconds 0 Ethernet 1 1 Line Initialization Attempts 0 Ethernet 1 Elapsed Seconds at interval 15 minutes 61 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Framing at inteval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Signal at interval 15 minutes o Ethernet 1 Loss of Power at interval 15 minutes 0 Etherne
32. 3 109 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 110 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 111 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 112 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 113 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3 114 Contents Chapter 4 Command Line Interface 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 4 1 Accessing the CLI 4 1 Console Connection 4 1 Telnet Connection 4 1 Entering Commands 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 4 3 Command Completion 4 3 Getting Help on Commands 4 3 Showing Commands 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 4 4 Negating the Effect of Commands 4 5 Using Command History 4 5 Understanding Command Modes 4 5 Exec Commands 4 5 Configuration Commands 4 6 Command Line Processing 4 7 Command Groups 4 8 Line Commands 4 9 line 4 9 login 4 10 password 4 11 exec timeout 4 12 password thresh 4 12 silent time 4 13 databits 4 14 parity 4 14 speed 4 15 stopbits 4 16 disconnect 4 16 show line 4 17 General Commands 4 17 enable 4 18 disable 4 18 configure 4 19 show history 4 19 reload 4 20 end 4 21 exit 4 21 quit 4 21 System Management Commands 4 22 Device Designation Commands 4 22 prompt 4 23 hostname 4 23 User Access Commands username enable password IP Filter Commands management show management Web Server Commands ip http port ip http server ip http secure server ip http secure port ip telnet server Secure Shell Commands ip ssh server ip
33. CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 84 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 4 95 Console config if Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate 100 Mbps for ports 1 12 1000 Mbps for ports 13 14 with Gigabit modules installed Range 1 1000 Mbps 3 50 Port Configuration Web Click Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 3 4 Disableds 5
34. Command Usage This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device e This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions 4 133 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 132 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type e auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Inter
35. Console show ip ssh Information of secure shell SSH status enable SSH authentication timeout 120 SSH authentication retries 3 Console show ssh Use this command to display the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state 0 admin 1 5 cipher 3des session started Console Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Username The user name of the client Version The Secure Shell version number Negotiation State The authentication negotiation state Values negotiation started authentication started session started Encryption Method The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include des 3des Terminology des Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3des Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key 4 34 System Management Commands Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Pag e logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 35 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 4 36 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC 4 37 messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4 37 logging trap Limits sys
36. Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none 3 41 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 f 1 47 58 46 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Link status Down Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console 1000 ull Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes e Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters e Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons e Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the
37. Side Local z Query Physical Interfaces Information Serial Number Vendor ID IACCTON Version Number 91 Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin 46 l Current Attenuation 54 Current Status po E Current Output Power 4294967284 Current Attainable Rate 1350000 Current Line Rate 1350000 Channel Interface Information Interleave Delay i CRC Block Length Current Transmit Rate Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction ajeteteata l zj CLI The following examples show how these parameters are displayed in the CLI Examples The following example displays physical interface information for VDSL port 1 Console show controllers efm phy table vtu c 1 1 4 118 VDSL_PHYS_ENTRY Ethernet 1 1 Serial Number Ethernet 1 1 Vendor ID ACCTON Ethernet 1 1 Version Number 91 Ethernet 1 1 Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin 45 Ethernet 1 1 Current Attenuation 54 Ethernet 1 1 Current Status 0 Ethernet 1 1 Current Output Power SA Ethernet 1 1 Current Attainable Rate 1350000 Ethernet 1 1 Current Line Rate 1350000 Console The following example displays channel interface information for VDSL port 1 Console show controllers efm channel table vtu c 1 1 4 119 VDSL_CHAN_ENTRY Ethernet 1 1 Channel Interleave Delay 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel CRC Block Length 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Transmit Rate 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Transmit Slo
38. Statistics History Alarm Event Standards ANSI Plan 998 Draft IETF ADSL MIB VDSL 10 IEEE 802 3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication ARP RFC 826 DHCP RFC 1541 HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNTP RFC 2030 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2 RFC 1907 SSH Version 1 5 Management Information Bases Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ethernet MIB RFC 2665 Ether like MIB RFC 1643 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1x Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2618 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC
39. VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program e If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart client command or by rebooting the switch Note Before you can change the IP address you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart client 4 83 4 167 Command Line Interface ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip
40. none 2 F Enable Trap and Shutdown I Enable ne Enable ome I Enable ome x T Enable oO ny oni na si Win TTT I CLI This example sets the command mode to Port 5 sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and then enables port security for the switch Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 67 config if port security config if 3 32 User Authentication Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1x dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication E Protocol over LANs l EAPOL to exchange 802 1 Bpa client authentication protocol messages with the clie
41. opcode file type then enter the source and destination file names set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch Console copy tftp file 4 55 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name M100000 bix Destination file name V1 0 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V1 0 4 59 Console config exit Console reload 4 20 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to direct
42. startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 4 56 Flash File Commands The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted Example This exa
43. vian database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete GC 4 137 VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name and state VC 4 138 vian database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command 4 137 Command Line Interface Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 143 vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vian id name vian name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vian id name state e vilan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend
44. 14 3 15 Contents Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server Setting the Startup Configuration File Copying the Running Configuration to a File Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Filtering Addresses for SNMP Client Access User Authentication Configuring the Logon Password Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Telnet Settings Configuring HTTPS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate Configuring the Secure Shell Configuring Port Security Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication Displaying 802 1x Global Settings Configuring 802 1x Global Settings Configuring Port Authorization Mode Displaying 802 1x Statistics Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status Configuring Interface Connections Creating Trunk Groups Statically Configuring a Trunk Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Configuring Port Mirroring Configuring Rate Limits Showing Port Statistics VDSL Configuration VDSL Global Configuration VDSL Port Configuration VDSL Port Link Status Displaying VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics VDSL Line Configuration Displaying VDSL Interface Information VDSL Performance Monitor Information Monitoring VDSL Performance History 3 16 3 16 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 18 3
45. 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 24 3 25 3 28 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 33 3 34 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 39 3 42 3 44 3 45 3 46 3 48 3 49 3 50 3 51 3 56 3 56 3 58 3 61 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 69 3 72 Contents Address Table Settings 3 73 Setting Static Addresses 3 73 Displaying the Address Table 3 74 Changing the Aging Time 3 75 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 76 Displaying Global Settings 3 77 Configuring Global Settings 3 79 Displaying Interface Settings 3 81 Configuring Interface Settings 3 84 VLAN Configuration 3 86 Overview 3 86 Assigning Ports to VLANs 3 87 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 88 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 88 Displaying Current VLANs 3 89 Creating VLANs 3 91 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 92 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 93 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 94 Configuring Private VLANs 3 96 Enabling Private VLANs 3 97 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 3 97 Class of Service Configuration 3 98 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 98 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 100 Selecting the Queue Mode 3 101 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 102 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 103 Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 103 Mapping IP Precedence 3 104 Mapping DSCP Priority 3 105 Mapping IP Port Priority 3 107 Copy Priority Settings 3 108 Multicast Filtering 3 109 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query
46. 4 71 Reauth period page 4 72 Tx period page 4 72 and Port control page 4 70 It also displays the following information Status Authorization status authorized or unauthorized Supplicant MAC address of authorized client 4 73 Command Line Interface e Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered e Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server e Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 4 74 Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 Max request 2 Quiet period 350 Reauth period 300 Tx period 300 Status Unauthorized Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 00 Authenticator S
47. 81 4 131 4 135 4 136 link type 3 83 3 85 4 134 path cost 3 77 4 131 path cost method 3 80 4 130 port priority 4 132 protocol migration 3 86 4 135 transmission limit 3 80 4 130 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 16 4 55 displaying 3 15 4 49 setting 3 15 4 59 static addresses setting 3 73 4 122 statistics port 3 51 4 92 STP 3 79 4 126 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 18 4 44 system software downloading from server 3 15 4 55 T TACACS logon authentication 3 25 4 64 time setting 3 18 4 44 traffic class weights 3 102 4 149 trap manager 2 7 3 22 4 78 troubleshooting C 1 trunk configuration 3 44 4 98 LACP 3 46 4 99 static 3 45 4 99 Index U upgrading software 3 15 4 55 user password 3 24 4 24 4 25 Vv VLANs 3 86 3 97 4 137 adding static members 3 92 3 93 4 142 creating 3 91 4 138 description 3 86 displaying basic information 3 88 4 146 displaying port members 3 89 4 143 egress mode 3 95 4 140 interface configuration 3 94 4 140 private 3 96 3 97 4 144 Ww Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 2 home page 3 2 menu list 3 3 panel display 3 3 Index 3 Index Index 4 VS4512 VS4512DC E122003 R02 150000041800A
48. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 64 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 4 65 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 65 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 66 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 64 Authentication Commands Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string n
49. Attribute Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch 3 114 Multicast Filtering Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Porn VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit 1 Port 1 Interface Pot VLAN ID 1s lt lt Add Multicast IP emove Port 1 gt Trunk CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 159 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 123 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 3 115 Configuring the Switch 3 116 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI
50. DS1 DS2 US1 US2 DS M DS I US M US I PBO Ethernet 1 1 Up 43 0 35 0 45 0 43 0 0 16 8 8 8 on Console This command displays the downstream and upstream rates of the VDSL port 1 Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 1 admin usrate 4 112 Upstream rate 12 50 Mbps Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 1 admin dsrate Downstream rate 12 50 Mbps Console 3 63 Configuring the Switch Displaying VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics display key statistics for an interface Web Click VDSL VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics VDSL Port Ethernet Statistics Interface Port z Select Switch Clear Counter Transmit Receive Transmit Bytes 8965799 Receive Bytes 1334563 Transmit Frames 6971 Receive Frames 15459 Pause Frames 0 Pause Frames lo Single Collision Frames 0 Broadcast Frames lo Multiple Collision Frames 0 Alignment Errors lo Late Collisions 0 Collisions and Runts lo Excessive Collisions 0 Frames Too Long lo Deferred Transmissions 0 FCS Errors lo Carrier Sense Errors 0 CPE 100 Base T Full duplex Transmit Receive Transmit Bytes 0 Receive Bytes 0 Transmit Frames 0 Receive Frames 0 Pause Frames 0 Pause Frames 0 Single Collision Frames 0 Broadcast Frames o Multiple Collision Frames 0 Alignment Errors lo Late Collisions 0 Collisions and Runts 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Frames Too Long 0 Defer
51. Defaults System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 17 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Function Parameter Default IP Settings Management VLAN 1 DHCP Enabled BOOTP Disabled User Specified Disabled IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Console Port Baud Rate 9600 Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1x Port Authentication Disabled SSL Enabled HTTPS Enabled SSH version 2 0 Enabled Port Security Disabled Introduction Function Parameter Default Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled IP Filtering Disabled Port Configuration Admi
52. Disabled gt zi CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 50 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if rate limit input 50 4 97 Console config if rate limit output 50 4 97 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView 3 51 Configuring the Switch Statistical Values Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Receiv
53. Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 111 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Port Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3 112 Configuration IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 3 113 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected 3 114 VLAN Basic Configuration Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location Contact Administrator responsible for the system e System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface e POST result Shows results of the power on self test Co
54. Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Pon 1 gt C Trunk z Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded 0 Recewed Unknown 0 Packets Packets Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Unicast Packets Transmit Multicast 2420 Packets Transmit Broadcast 47 Transmit Discarded o Packets Packets Transmit Errors 0 i gt 3 54 Port Configuration Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions 0 FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Single Collision Frames rema MAC Trenamit 0 rrors Multiple Collision Frames 0 Carrier Sense Errors 0 SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions rai ace 0 RMON Statistics Drop Events DlJabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 47 165 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversi
55. GC 4 68 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4 69 dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch GC 4 69 retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 70 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4 70 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 71 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports GC 4 71 dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max GC 4 71 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must GC 4 72 be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication session that GC 4 72 the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 73 authentication dot1x default This command sets the default authentication server type Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication dot1x default radius no authentication dot1x 4 68 Authentication Commands Default Setting RADIUS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config authentication dotlx default radius Console config dot1x default This command sets
56. ID of 1 6 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New none lt lt Add Trunk 1 1 Remove Port 137 3 45 Configuring the Switch CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 13 and 14 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 14 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000GBIC Mac address 00 01 00 02 00 10 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 1000full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Down Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure dynamically you enable LACP before connecting the ports enabled and also disconnect the ports before disabling aS LACP
57. Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line 4 15 Command Line Interface stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect Use this command to terminate an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier O will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands
58. None Current status Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 51 4 92 Interface Commands Example Ethernet 1 1 Iftable stats Octets input 113404 Octets output 742007 Unicast input 739 Unicast output 836 Discard input 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 482 Broadcast input 38 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors Single Collision frames SQE Test errors 0 Late collisions 0 nternal mac transmit errors 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions Packet size lt 64 octets 1332 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 9 Console Discard output 0 QLen output 0 Multi cast output 9 Broadcast output 0 0 0 Multiple collision frames 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Excessive c
59. Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Disabled SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled Introduction 1 8 Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is assigned by DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 The switch s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as HP OpenView The switch s Web interface CLI configuration
60. Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 17 show users 4 53 login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login e login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively e no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Norm
61. Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 29 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 55 4 29 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 30 copy tftp https certificate 4 55 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 29 ip telnet server Use this command to enable the device to be configured or monitored by Telnet Use the no form of this command to disable this function Syntax no ip telnet server 4 30 System Management Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config Console config ip t
62. a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset 4 90 Interface Commands Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 39 4 91 Command Line Interface Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Basic information Port type 100TX EFM Mac address 00 01 00 02 00 04 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 650 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action
63. an SNTP client in two modes Unicast The switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Broadcast The switch sets its clock from a time server in the same subnet that broadcasts time updates If there is more than one SNTP server the switch accepts the first broadcast it detects and ignores broadcasts from other servers Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time servers i e client mode update its clock using information broadcast from time servers or use both methods When both methods are enabled the switch will update its clock using information broadcast from time servers but will query the specified server s if a broadcast is not received within the polling interval Command Attributes e SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client This mode requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field SNTP Broadcast Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP broadcast client Basic Configuration SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server when set to SNTP Client mode Range 16 16284 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server In unicast mode sets the IP address for u
64. and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if 4 141 Command Line Interface switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vlan id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1
65. and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing 3 86 VLAN Configuration VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs e End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged p
66. any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs 4 126 Spanning Tree Commands e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree
67. are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Trap Manager IP Address Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Trap Manager Community String Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap Version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps The default is version 1 e Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process The default is enabled e Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues link up or link down traps The default is enabled Web Click SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive these messages specify the SNMP version mark the trap types required and then click Add Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New none Trap Manager IP address 192 168 1 19 lt lt Add Trap Manager Community String private Remove Trap Version 2c
68. authentication login radius Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout 10 Console show radius server Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with radius server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console config authentication login tacacs Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 Console config tacacs server port 200 Console config tacacs server key green Console show tacacs server Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server green Server port number 200 Console config 3 27 Configuring the Switch Telnet Settings Telnet access to the switch can be enabled via the Web or CLI Web Click Security Telnet Settings then check the checkbox to enable access via Telnet i e a virtual terminal El Telnet Settings Telnet Status M Enabled CLI This example enables Telnet access to the switch Console config 4 30 Console config ip telnet server Console config line Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service c
69. cipher 3des session started Console disconnect ssh 0 Console Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security first allow the switch to dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period and then enable port security to stop address learning Be sure you enable the learning function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been registered on the selected port Note that you can also restrict the maximum number of addresses that can be learned by a port To add new VLAN members at a later time you can manually add secure addresses with the Static Address Table page 3 73 or turn off port security to reenable the learning function long enough for new VLAN members to be registered Learning may then be disabled again
70. cost 200000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 18131 Transmission limit 23 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role root State forwarding Path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 Designated root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Console 4 136 VLAN Commands VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 4 137 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 4 139 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering and PVID Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 4 143 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 144 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page
71. default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 169 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 169 4 168 IP Interface Commands show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 168 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host count count size size e host IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 e size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size
72. each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device It then selects a port on the designated bridging device to communicate with each attached LAN or host device as a designated port After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated Root A ek s ji x x A x de Designated x Aa fF _ Designated Port PC N Ly dias X I Bridge x Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge 3 76 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around one tenth of the time required by STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a
73. hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 e sec Second Range 0 59 e day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 4 48 System Management Commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar set 15 12 34 February 1 2002 Console System Status Commands Command Function Mode Pag e show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 4 49 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 51 show system Displays system information NE PE 4 53 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 4 53 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 54 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the
74. if desired for security Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 42 3 31 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Port Port number Action The action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 These actions can only be taken through CLI commands Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port select Enabled from the drop down list in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 20 Trunk ome I Enable nne F Enable none F Enable
75. in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command Messages Any system and event messages stored in memory 4 39 Command Line Interface The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility type facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command server IP address Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 43 SMTP Alert Commands Configures SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients
76. lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Glossary 3 Glossary Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It
77. management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1x protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1x client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffe
78. named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 16 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 14 for more information Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and view statis
79. no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 132 Spanning Tree Commands Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast command Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 133 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel
80. node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must rece
81. password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level eve 0 7 password no enable password level evel e level evel Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 18 e The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 18 4 25 Command Line Interface IP Filter Commands
82. port Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Use this command to troubleshoot VDSL port performance Example The following example resets the CO side VDSL and CPE side VDSL chipset of VDSL port 1 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm reset local Console config if efm reset remote Console config if efm shutdown Use this command to disable a VDSL interface To enable a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no efm shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled 4 104 VDSL Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Use this command to disable the VDSL chipset transmitter of a VDSL port that is not connected to a working CPE In some unusual circumstances the power emitted by VDSL ports can affect other VDSL ports It is recommended that ports that are not wired to CPEs be shut down in this way Also use this command to disable access to the switch from this port Example The following example disables VDSL port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm shutdown Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 89 efm rdl Use this command to enable Remote Digital Loopback RDL Use the no form of this command to disable RDL Syntax efm rdl no efm rdl Default Setting Off Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Remote Digital L
83. port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None 4 155 Command Line Interface show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 1 1 Eth 1 5 2 A Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 152 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 153 show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port channel channel id Value 1 4 156 Priority Commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o o Eth 1 1 1 o0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Console Related C
84. program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords for up to 16 users Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Configure IGMP multicast filtering e Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing e Configure one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports Enable port mirroring Initial Configuration e Globally set broadcast storm control e Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation so
85. requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 110 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 112 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service t
86. that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the four class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 4 16 64 are assigned to queues 0 3 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 Console config Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 151 4 149 Command Line Interface queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 3 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos7 cosn no queue cos map
87. the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart client to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt Initial Configuration 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy runn
88. the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System Firmware Enter the source and destination file names with any other relevant details such as the IP address of the TFTP server if used and click Transfer from Server Transfer Operation Code Image File from Server Current Operation Code Version 1 0 4 0 ITFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 20 i Source File Name sasav 0 3 7 Destination File Name c vsasi2v_1 036bix x VS4512v_1 0 37 Transfer from Server El If you download to a new destination file then select the file from the drop down box for the operation code used at startup and click Apply Changes To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Operation Code Image File File Name VS4512V_11 03 bix Apply Changes To remove an operating code file select the file from the drop down list and click Remove File wm Remove Operation Code Image File File Name VS4512V_1 0 3 6 bix z Remove File Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config or
89. the functional groups shown below Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet 4 9 including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 4 17 system or quitting the CLI System Management Controls system logs system passwords user name browser 4 22 management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 55 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote authentication 4 60 also configures port security and IEEE 802 1x port access control SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 4 76 strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering DHCP Configures DHCP client 4 82 Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 4 91 aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data 4 95 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 97 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 4 98 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks VDSL Used to to configure and display communication parameters for VDSL 4 101 and ethernet por
90. the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 30 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 163 Command Line Interface Command Usage e The switch must be using GMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds C
91. to issue link up or link down traps The link up down trap can only be enabled disabled via the CLI Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 78 4 79 Command Line Interface snmp ip filter This command sets the IP addresses of clients that are allowed management access to the switch via SNMP Use the no form the remove an IP address Syntax no snmp ip filter jp_address subnet_mask ip_address An IP address indicating a client or group of clients that are allowed SNMP access to the switch e subnet_mask
92. to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaultVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4093 lt lt Add VLAN Name Status I Enable CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 137 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 138 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 143 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Ethl 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Ethl 6 Ethl 7 Ethl 8 Ethl 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 2 Static R amp D Active Console config vlan 3 91 Configuring the Switch Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Notes 1 Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 93 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN con
93. unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type Cconsole reload 3 29 Configuring the Switch Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rsh remote shell and rexec remote execute are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH provides remote management access via encrypted paths between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients The commands described in this section include commands used to configure the SSH server However you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication Note The switch suppor
94. user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked 3 25 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes e Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence e RADIUS Settings Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authen
95. which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds 3 75 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status M Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 300 seconds CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 124 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device It selects a designated bridging device from
96. will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond lf the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 4 169 Command Line Interface Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 84 4 170 Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1x HTTPS SSH Port Security DHCP Client Po
97. 0 feet of 24 gauge twisted pair cable over the existing copper telephone lines between end users and telephone companies Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 6 Index Numerics 802 1x port authentication 3 33 4 68 A acceptable frame type 3 94 4 140 address table 3 73 4 122 aging time 3 75 4 125 B BOOTP 3 13 4 167 BPDU 3 76 broadcast storm threshold 3 48 4 89 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 4 command line interface See CLI community string 2 6 3 21 4 76 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 7 3 16 4 55 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 98 4 147 DSCP 3 105 4 153 IP precedence 3 104 4 152 layer 3 4 priorities 3 103 4 152 queue mapping 3 100 4 150 queue mode _ 3 101 4 148 traffic class weights 3 102 4 149 D default gateway configuration 3 12 4 168 default priority ingress port 3 98 4 147 default settings system 1 5 DHCP 3 13 4 167 client 3 12 4 82 dynamic configuration 2 5 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP downloadin
98. 0 gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0
99. 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 Software Specifications A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet Web browser or SNMP software Be sure you have configured the agent with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway e If you are trying to connect to the agent via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station must include the appropriate tag in its transmitted frames Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Check network cabling between the management station and the switch e If you cannot connect using Telnet or SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate set to any of the following 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact your local distributor Troubleshooting B 2 Glossary Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address infor
100. 2 show controllers efm profile 4 112 show controllers efm admin Use this command to display the actual values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL port Syntax show controllers efm interface id admin dsrate usrate e interface id ID of the VDSL port e dsrate Displays the downstream rate Mbps of the VDSL link e usrate Displays the upstream rate Mbps of the VDSL link Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage This command displays the downstream and upstream rates of VDSL port 1 Example Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 1 admin usrate Upstream rate 12 50 Mbps Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 1 admin dsrate Downstream rate 12 50 Mbps Console Related Commands show controllers efm actual 4 111 show controllers efm profile 4 112 show controllers efm profile Use this command to to display information about the profiles available on the switch and how they are assigned to the VDSL ports Syntax show controllers efm profile mapping names mapping Displays a list of the VDSL ports and their assigned profiles names Displays the names types and upstream and downstream data rates of all profiles available on the switch Overall data rates are displayed The usable data rates are somewhat lower Default Setting None 4 112 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage VDSL Commands See efm profile global 4 102 for the VDSL profiles ship
101. 253 Operation code version 1 0 0 0 Console 4 54 Flash File Commands Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE 4 55 memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 57 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 58 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 59 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4 59 copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that
102. 30AG R1 20 Not Used 20 14 3 000AG R1 23 10 23 20 S1 16 16 20 10 20 17 A1 34 11 29 20 17 14 S2 16 16A 20 10 20 17 A2 34 11A 29 20 17 14 A3 25 3 26 10 17 Not used A4 45 5 32 23 17 10 3 58 VDSL Configuration Profile Name Theoretical Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio dB 35 26 23 14 A5 50 7 A6 22 3A 10 A7 40 5A Not Used A8 46 7A TLAN Max Rate Noise margins should be configured to a level appropriate to the actual noise level of the environment A noisier environment requires a higher noise margin to ensure a stable link The noise margin only comes into effect after a link is activated Increasing the noise margin can result in the switch choosing a lower profile This will provide a link with a longer range but a lower data rate Example The table below gives an example of a noise margin for a given profile and theoretical minimum SNR Profile Name Downstream Upstream Rate SNR Noise Margin Rate Mbps Mbps dB 1 16 16 16 74 10 20 6 Range 0 9 dB Default 0 dB Interleave Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse noise A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the effective bandwidth of the link The degree of interleaving can be increased by increasing the following parameters M The interleaving depth index Range 0 64 Upst
103. 34 3 24 SalI TAI 3 24 Ek TRS 5 40 40 50 Related Commands show controllers efm actual 4 111 show controllers efm admin 4 112 4 113 Command Line Interface show controllers efm status Use this command to display the VDSL link statistics and profile information on a specific VDSL port including link state link duration data rates power levels signal to noise ratio and Reed Solomon errors Syntax show controllers efm status link profile interface id e interface id ID of the VDSL port e link Displays VDSL link parameters and status e profile Displays VDSL link parameters and status Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage SNR and Reed Solomon error information display the quality of the VDSL link e The SNR represents the upper limit of received signal to noise ratio that the switch will handle before disconnecting from the remote CPE The Reed Solomon errors show the number of errors detected and corrected in the data being received on and transmitted from the VDSL ports Reed Solomon errors are the result of noise exceeding the noise margin Note The Reed Solomon errors are reset each time the show controllers efm status link command is performed Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse noise A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the
104. 4 84 Console config if efm pbo 4 109 Console config if 3 60 VDSL Configuration The following example shows rate adaption enabled for port 1 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if efm rate adapt 4 108 Console config if end Console The following example configures VDSL port 1 with an upstream noise margin of 6 and a downstream noise margin of 6 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if efm noise margin 6 6 4 107 Console config if end Console The following example configures VDSL port 1 with M downstream value 16 Upstream value 8 e downstream value 8 Upstream value 8 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if efm interleave 16 8 8 8 4 106 Console config if end Console show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1 1 Interface Link SNR dB RS Errs Interleaver DS1 DS2 US1 US2 DS M DS I US M US I PBO Ethernet 1 1 Up 43 0 35 0 45 0 43 0 0 16 8 8 8 on Console VDSL Port Link Status Command Attributes e General Status Link Shows the status of the VDSL link Noise Margin To ensure a stable link you should add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal to noise ratio SNR For details see VDSL Port Configuration on page 3 58 Range 0 9 dBm Default 0 dBm PMD1 Status SNR dB The signal to no
105. 5 Designated root Designated bridge Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Eth 1 5 information Admin status enable Role disable State discarding Path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 5 61440 0 0000E9313131 61440 0 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto point to point enable Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 81 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning
106. 6 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Switch unit 1 port Port number e x Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports 4 95 Command Line Interface Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor
107. 77 3774 Asia Pacific Headquarters 1 Claymore Drive 08 05 06 Orchard Towers Rear Block Singapore 229594 Phone 65 238 6556 Fax 65 238 6466 Internet www acctontech com Accton is a trademark of Accton Technology Corporation Other trademarks or brand names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies VS4512 VS4512DC F1 0 4 0 E122003 R02 150000041800A Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Key Features Description of Software Features System Defaults Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options Required Connections Remote Connections Basic Configuration Console Connection Setting Passwords Setting an IP Address Manual Configuration Dynamic Configuration Enabling SNMP Management Access Community Strings Trap Receivers Saving Configuration Settings Managing System Files Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Home Page Configuration Options Panel Display Main Menu Basic Configuration Displaying System Information Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities Setting the Switch s IP Address Manual Configuration Using DHCP BOOTP Fan Status Managing Firmware Downloading System Software from a Server 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 7 2 7 2 8 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 7 3 7 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3
108. Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian list no switchport allowed vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged 4 142 VLAN Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged e If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at mos
109. D Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 86 e GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering 3 10 Basic Configuration Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Leaming M oOo Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable E No g GMRP I Enable E CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 146 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable Yes Traffic classes Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address An IP address may be used for management access to the switch over your network By default the switch uses DHCP to assign IP settings to VLAN 1 on the switch If you wish to manually configure IP settings you need to change the switch s user specified defaults IP
110. IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 153 Command Line Interface Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority e IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 IP DSCP Value CoS Value
111. Message Age 2 1 e Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP e Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned
112. P for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 99 Command Line Interface Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically e If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 13 14 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console Console config interface ethernet 1 13 config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 14 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config exit Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000GBIC Mac address 00 00 e8 00 00 0b Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port sec
113. P Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled e IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 e IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 30 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Tim
114. S map Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces 3 105 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP0 coso By DSCP1 CoS0 DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 z Class of Service Value 0 7 fi Restore Default CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status enabled DSCP COS Eth Eth Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 106 Class of Service Configuration Mapping IP Port Priority In the IP Port Priority page for each switch port or trunk you can map IP ports TCP UDP ports to the switch s 4 traffic class queues Command Attributes Current IP Port Table displays a list of IP p
115. This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config 4 23 Command Line Interface User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 9 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 60 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 68 Command Function Mode Pag e username Establishes a user name based authentication system at login GC 4 24 enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4 25 username This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is r
116. VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage e no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name no vlan vian id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 143 4 138 VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC 4 139 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface Cc 4 140 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface c 4 140 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface C 4 141 switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface Cc 4 142 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface Cc 4 142 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vian id vian
117. actly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors Account of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Etherne
118. adcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space ransmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode 3 52 Port Configuration Parameter Description Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by ex
119. address 0 0 0 0 and netmask 255 0 0 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program 3 11 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask ident
120. addresses 3 84 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Adm
121. al Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers 4 10 Line Commands Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 24 password 4 11 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually config
122. al Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio dB Default Not Used Not Used A1 020AG R1 Not Used Not Used A2 020AG R1 Not Used Not Used A3 010AG R1 10 Not Used A4 010AG R1 20 Not Used 1 030AG R1 Not Used 2 030AG R1 Not Used S3 000AG R1 10 1 16 16 10 A1 34 11 20 S2 16 16A 10 A2 34 11A 20 A3 25 3 10 A4 45 5 23 A5 50 7 26 4 107 Command Line Interface Profile Name Theoretical Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio dB aA nel i S 26 10 17 10 A6 22 3A A7 40 5A Not Used A8 46 7A TLAN Max Rate Example The following example configures VDSL port 1 with an upstream noise margin of 6 and a downstream noise margin of 6 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm noise margin 6 6 Console config if end Related Commands efm interleave 4 106 show controllers efm noise margin 4 116 efm rate adapt This command enables and disables the rate adaption feature on the selected VDSL port Syntax efm rate adapt no efm rate adapt Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors such as temperature humidity and electro magnetic radiation When rate adaption is enabled the switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for the current conditions Example The following example shows rate adaption enabled for port 1
123. all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Syntax dot1x default Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotix default Console config dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1ix max req 2 Console config 4 69 Command Line Interface dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access e force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise e force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx port control auto Console config if
124. allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 55 Command Line Interface Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory e You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must use a direct console connection and access the download menu during a boot up to download the Boot ROM or diagnostic image Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name
125. ame and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 e C Q be 919190919 9 919 9191919 OY Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 142 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged config if exit config interface ethernet 1 13 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member 3 93 Configuring the Switch Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN S
126. an be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data e The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 4 x or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 29 3 28 User Authentication Command Attributes HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s we
127. and displays which files were booted when the system powered up Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte diag _0060 Boot Rom image x 111360 run 0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 startup Config File Y 2710 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code The colon is required filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A colon is required after the specified file type e If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config 4 59 Command Line Interface Related Commands dir 4 58 whichboot 4 59 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network clie
128. annel Current Bad Block at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Valid Intervals at interval 1 day 30 Ethernet 1 Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day 0 VDSL_CHAN PERF DATA ENTRY FAST Ethernet 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day 0 Console VDSL Commands 4 121 Command Line Interface Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 122 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4 123 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 123 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 124 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 125 aging time mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan vian id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vian id e mac address MAC address interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port
129. any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Command Line Interface To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 4 84 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty O prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty
130. are sent untagged Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 3 95 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration Port PVID Acceptable Frame Type Ingress Filtering Mode Trunk Member lif AL gt Enabled Hybrid gt ai l Aa N M Enabled Pyora a af AL l Enabled Hybrid sh M g Enabled Hybrid z 5 iz ALL ba I Enabled Hybrid sf AL l Enabled Hybrid z l7f AL Z l Enabled Hybrid gt of fa E Fenabied Pyora 2 off fxm a Enabled Hybrid z of AL Z l Enabled Hybrid T pua z Enabled Hybid Z lif AL F Enabled Hybrid gt af fac M Enabled Hybond z 1 puah AL Z I Enabled Hybrid CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Consol
131. art The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp ld The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Raq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Web Select Security 802 1x Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 3 38 Port Configura
132. ast Filtering Commands show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian id user igmp snooping e vilan id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Pag e ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4 162 ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 162 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 163 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 163 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 164 router port expire time 4 161 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Confi
133. ation This Web page assigns the same profile to each VDSL switch port Details of these profiles are given in the table below Profile Name ProfileType Downstream Rate Upstream Rate Mbps Mbps Default A1 020AG R1 A2 020AG R1 A3 010AG R1 A4 010AG R1 1 030AG R1 2 030AG R1 Publi 3 000AG R1 Publi 1 16 16 Private 2 16 16A Private A1 34 11 Private A2 34 11A Private Private Private Private Private Private Private Private Private Notes 1 The VDSL Intelligent Switch uses Ethernet in the First Mile EFM a VDSL based technology 2 A suffix of A in the profile name e g S2 16 16A indicate that this profile is for both VDSL and ADSL lines in a bundle Profiles without a suffix of A in the profile name e g S1 16 16 are for VDSL lines only 3 The following profiles are recommended for use with this switch S1 16 16 S2 16 16A A1 34 11 and A2 34 11A 3 56 VDSL Configuration 4 The maximum distances for VDSL links using the recommended profiles are Upstream Downstream Mode Max Range 16 Mbps 16 Mbps Symmetric 600m 1970 ft 11 Mbps 34 Mbps Asymetric 610m 2000 ft 5 Type 1 26 AWG 100 ohm 0 4 mm or Type 2 24 AWG 100 ohm 0 5 mm cable may be installed to achieve the maximum distance However typically 24 AWG 100 ohm 0 5 mm wire is better than 26 AWG 100 ohm 0 4 mm wire N
134. b interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status Enabled gt Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 441 CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 29 Console config ip http secure port 441 4 30 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Caution For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default
135. bled Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1OOOBASE SX LX LH 1000full 100BASE TX 100full Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 44 Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port 1 N Max MAC Name Admin Count Duplex 020 P Speed Flow Control Autonegotiation Trunk M Enabled 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym Enabled mior ioo M 1000r MFC M Enabled 0 M Enabled 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 7 le ior mior M 10001 Cec M Enabled 0 M Enabled 0 M Enabled 10h 100h M 1000h M Sym F Enabled wio M 100f FM 1000f TFC M Enabled 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym F Enabl 0 Enabled wio M 100f M1000f Frc F Enabled M Enabled M 10h 100h M 1000h M Sym mio 1001 10001 MFC M Enabled 0 TAIBIBIE 3 43 Configuring the Switch CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings e config interface ethernet 1 12 e config if description RD SW 12 e config if shutdown config if no shutdown config if no negotiation config if speed duplex 100half config if f lowcontrol e e e
136. btrusive manner port s target port Command Usage Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port e When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions e Source Unit The switch containing the mirror source port This switch does not support stacking so this number will always be 1 Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both e Target Unit The switch containing the mirror target port This switch does not support stacking so this number will always be 1 Target Port The port that will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port 3 49 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port Mirror Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the target port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New none Source Unit fi gt kaa Source Port 1 T Type Rx gt E Target Unit f Target Port Ba E CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the
137. c Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 8 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol adds a level of fault tolerance by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between seg
138. ce Configuration CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 Precedence mapping status enabled Precedence COS PRRPRPRPRPEPR YAURWNHO NYHAURWNTO Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 Nl OD oy AJ wl N gt Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to Co
139. cellent Effort Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter 2 0 3 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue CLI shows Queue ID 3 100 Class of Service Configuration Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Mark an interface and click Select to display the current mapping of CoS values to output queues Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues for the selected interface then click Apply Traffic Classes Interface G Port Trunt Select Priority Traffic Class 0 3 0 1 FAAATA CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config queue cos map 0 0 4 150 Console config queue cos map 1 1 Console config queue cos map 2 2 Console config exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 151 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01234567 Priority Queue 0 121 2 2 3 3 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the que
140. ces Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE 4 93 switchport interface switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero 4 147 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used This switch provides four priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the
141. ch Syntax efm profile global profile name profile name Name of the profile Default Setting Default Profile Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Assigns the same profile to each VDSL switch port Details of these profiles are given in the table below Mbps Mbps A1 020AG R1 Publi A2 020AG R1 Publi A3 010AG R1 Publi A4 010AG R1 Publi 1 030AG R1 Publi 2 030AG R1 Publi 3 000AG R1 Publi S1 16 16 Private S2 16 16A Private A1 34 11 Private A2 34 11A Private A3 25 3 Private A4 45 5 Private A5 50 7 Private A6 22 3A Private A7 40 5A Private A8 46 7A Private TLAN Private Max Rate Private Notes 1 The VDSL Intelligent Switch uses Ethernet in the First Mile EFM a VDSL based technology 4 102 VDSL Commands 2 A suffix of A in the profile name e g S2 16 16A indicates that this profile is for both VDSL and ADSL lines in a bundle Profiles without a suffix of A in the profile name e g S1 16 16 are for VDSL lines only 3 The following profiles are recommended for use with this switch S1 16 16 S2 16 16A A1 34 11 and A2 34 11A 4 The maximum distances for VDSL links using the recommended profiles are Upstream Downstream Mode Max Range 16 Mbps 16 Mbps Symmetric 600m 1970 ft 11 Mbps 34 Mbps Asymetric 610m 2000 ft 5 Type 1 26 AWG 100 ohm 0 4 mm or Type 2 24 AWG 100 oh
142. channel channel id Value 1 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down 4 122 Address Table Commands e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example console clear mac address table dynamic show mac address table This command sho
143. client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of 802 1x on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified e Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured e The RADIUS server and 802 1x client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 TLS TTLS PEAP etc Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it 3 33 Configuring the Switch Displaying 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes 802 1x Re authentication Indicates if switch port requires a client to be re authenticated after a certain period of time 802 1x Max Request Count The maximum number of times the switch port
144. cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 84 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 84 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from ano
145. d Root 32768 0000ABCD0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCDO000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d0 h0 min 35 s 3 78 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Designated Root 32768 000087654321 Current root port Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 23771 Transmission limit gt Path Cost Method long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the sw
146. d for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging Glossary 2 Glossary IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the
147. d traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk 3 74 VDSL Configuration Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by Interface Port fi gt Trunk z T Mac Address I VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address x Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 123 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Status Enables disables the function Aging Time The time after
148. den Vlan Console Not supported in the present version Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 89 Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 99 Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 97 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 140 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 141 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 140 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 142 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 147 Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 142 Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface cannot dynamically join via GVRP Not supported in the current version 4 94 Mirror Port Commands Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 95 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 9
149. display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Syntax enable evel level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 25 The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 18 enable password 4 25 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 18 General Commands Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 18 configure This command activates Global Config
150. dress is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 83 Console Fan Status The status of the switch fans can be displayed Web Click System Fan Status Fan Status Fan Status fi ok 2 ok 3 Jok H 4 ok Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version The drop down menu in the web interface allows you to specify the method of file transfer Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Destination Startup File Name Allows specification of filenames already in memory or the creation of a new filename Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 Source File Name Allows you to specify the name of the chosen source file 3 14 Basic Configuration Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in
151. duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub 4 88 Interface Commands Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if flowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 86 capabilities 4 87 shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons E
152. e 8 2 Physical Medium Specific Transmission Convergence Web Click VDSL Port Link Status Interface G Port Ad PBO Rate Adaptation PMS TC Status Reed Solomon Errors Interleave Downstream M Value Downstream I Value i Upstream M Value Upstream Value Select General Status Link up DownStream Value dBm 0 Noise Margin z UpStream Value dBm 0 PMD Status Downstream 1 440 Downstream 2 35 0 SNR dB Upstream 1 440 Upstream 2 440 Downstream Rate Mbps 16 74 Upstream Rate Mbps 16 20 on off 3 62 VDSL Configuration CLI The following examples show how VDSL link current values are displayed in the CLI Examples The following example displays VDSL link current values on VDSL switch port 2 Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual dsrserrs 4 111 Downstream Reed Solomon errors 0 Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual link Link status Down Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual rxpower Local receive power 26 00 dBm Hz Console show controller lre Ethernet 1 2 actual snr SNR 27 00 dB Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual txpower Remote transmit power 89 70 dBm Hz Console The following example displays link status signal to noise ratios Reed Solomon errors interleaver parameters and PBO status on VDSL switch port 1 Console show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1 1 4 114 Interface Link SNR dB RS Errs Interleaver
153. e Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console Related Commands show logging 4 39 4 38 System Management Commands show logging This command displays the logging configuration along with any system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 43 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 and lists one sample error Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enable History logging in FLASH level errors 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enable History logging in RAM level debugging 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging
154. e config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports X Secondary VLAN private ports 3 96 VLAN Configuration Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled z CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 4 144 Console config Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Check the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Stat
155. e authentication dot1x timeout quiet period dot1x timeout re authperiod dot1x timeout tx period show dot1x 4 49 4 49 4 51 4 53 4 53 4 54 4 55 4 55 4 57 4 58 4 59 4 59 4 60 4 60 4 60 4 61 4 61 4 62 4 62 4 63 4 63 4 64 4 64 4 64 4 65 4 65 4 66 4 66 4 67 4 68 4 68 4 69 4 69 4 70 4 70 4 71 4 71 4 71 4 72 4 72 4 73 SNMP Commands snmp server community snmp server contact snmp server location snmp server host snmp server enable traps snmp ip filter show snmp DHCP Commands DHCP Client ip dhcp client identifier ip dhcp restart client Interface Commands interface description speed duplex negotiation capabilities flowcontrol shutdown switchport broadcast packet rate clear counters show interfaces status show interfaces counters show interfaces switchport Mirror Port Commands port monitor show port monitor Rate Limit Commands rate limit Link Aggregation Commands channel group lacp VDSL Commands efm profile global efm profile efm reset efm shutdown efm rdl efm interleave efm noise margin efm rate adapt efm pbo show controllers ethernet controller show controllers efm actual Contents 4 76 4 76 4 77 4 77 4 78 4 79 4 80 4 81 4 82 4 82 4 82 4 83 4 84 4 84 4 85 4 85 4 86 4 87 4 88 4 89 4 89 4 90 4 91 4 92 4 93 4 95 4 95 4 96 4 97 4 97 4 98 4 99 4 99 4 101 4 102 4 103 4 104 4 104 4 105 4 106 4 107 4 108 4 109 4 109 4 111 vii Contents sho
156. e copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config Entering Commands To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 9 Interface interface ethernet port port channel id vlan id Console config if T 491 VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 137 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Con
157. e id admin show controllers efm remote ethernet mode Use this command to display the connected CPE Ethernet mode Syntax show controllers efm remote ethernet mode interface id interface id ID of the VDSL port Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage This command displays the speed and duplex mode for the CPE side VDSL link Examples Console show controllers efm remote ethernet mode ethernet 1 1 Interface Speed Duplex Ethernet 1 1 100 Full Console Related Commands show controllers efm actual 4 111 show controllers efm admin 4 112 show controllers efm status 4 114 show controllers efm channel performance 4 117 4 115 Command Line Interface show controllers efm noise margin This command displays the noise margin for the switch s VDSL ports Syntax show controllers efm noise margin Default Setting Default 0 dBm Command Mode Privileged EXEC Example This example displays the downstream DS and upstream US noise margin for the switch s VDSL ports Console show controllers efm noise margin Interface Noise Margin DS US Ethernet 1 1 Ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 1 3 Ethernet 1 4 Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Ethernet 1 9 Ethernet 1 10 Ethernet 1 11 Ethernet 1 12 Ethernet 1 13 Ethernet 1 14 Console oooooo co 0C0C CCC 0C oO ooo0oo0o0o000000000 Related Commands show controllers efm actual 4 111 show c
158. e switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval An Errored Second is a one second interval containing one or more CRC anomalies or one or more LOS or LOF defects Severely Errored Second Number of Severely Errored Seconds since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval An Errored Second is a one second interval containing one or more CRC anomalies or one or more LOS or LOF defects Unavailable Second Number of Unavailable Seconds since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval Init Number of line initialization attempts since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval This count includes both successful and failed attempts Valid intervals The number of intervals within which no errors have been detected Invalid Intervals The number of intervals within which errors have been detected Channel Performance Data Information Current Time Elapsed The time elapsed in minutes Current Fixed Octet The number of corrected octets Current Bad Block The number of uncorrectable blocks Current Valid Interval The number of intervals within which no errors have been detected Current invalid Interval The number of intervals within which errors have been detected 3 69 Configuring the Switch Web Click VDSL Performance Monitor Information VDSL Performance Monitor Information Line 1 E chanet Slow Side Local z
159. ed Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters ransmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent ransmit Bro
160. ed duplex Auto Capabilities 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 3 Eth1 14 Console 3 47 Configuring the Switch Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default The default threshold is 500 packets per second e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic e The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch Command Attributes Threshold Threshold in packets per second Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 packets per second Broadcast Control Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Web Click Port Broadcast Control Set the threshold set Broadcast Control Stat
161. effective bandwidth of the link The degree of interleaving can be increased by increasing M or I M is the interleaving depth index and is the interleaving block length For details see VDSL Port Link Status on page 3 61 e If PBO is enabled the power of transmission from the port will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port Examples This example displays the link status signal to noise ratio Reed Solomon errors and interleaver parameters for the VDSL link for port 1 Console show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1 1 Interface Link SNR dB RS Errs Interleaver DS1 DS2 US1 US2 DS M DS I US M US I PBO Ethernet 1 1 Up 45 0 35 0 46 0 44 0 0 16 8 8 8 on Console 4 114 VDSL Commands This example displays the link status uptime profile name downstream and upstream rates and the number of link failures for the switch s VDSL ports Interface Link Uptime Profile Name DSRate USRate Fail Ethernet 1 1 Up 0 38 30 default 4 17 1 56 0 Ethernet 1 2 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 3 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 4 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 5 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 6 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 7 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Ethernet 1 8 Down 0 0 0 default 0 00 0 00 0 Related Commands show controllers efm interface id actual show controllers efm interfac
162. elnet server Console config line Secure Shell Commands The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rsh remote shell and rexec remote execute are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH provides remote management access via encrypted paths between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients The commands described in this section show how to configure the SSH server However you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication Note The switch supports only SSH Version 1 5 Command Function Mode Pag e ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 31 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4 35 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4 33 authentication retries disconnect ssh Terminates an SSH connection PE 4 33 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured
163. en E If the target switch has also enabled LACP on cL eee rani the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically TAA IA E E E A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next configured available trunk ID members If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation 3 46 Port Configuration Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New none lt lt Add Port 13 Remove x CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 13 and 14 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 84 Console config if lacp 4 99 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 14 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 91 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000GBIC Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2d Configuration Name Port admin status Up Spe
164. eout 3 110 Multicast Filtering Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status N Enable Act as IGMP Querier Enable IGMP Query Count 2 10 ee IGMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 30 10 seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds IGMP Version 1 2 2 CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 158 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 162 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 162 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 163 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 163 Console config ip igmp snooping query time out 300 4 164 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 159 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 160 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Interne
165. equired or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 e access level evel Specifies the user level e The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords 4 24 System Management Commands Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob
166. es 0 Ethernet 1 Line Initialization Attempts at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Valid Intervals at interval 15 minutes 96 Ethernet 1 nvalid Intervals at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 1 Time Elapsed at interval 1 day 10861 Ethernet 1 Loss of Frame at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Valid Intervals at interval 1 day 30 Ethernet 1 nvalid Intervals at interval 1 day 0 VDSL_CHAN PERF DATA ENTRY SLOW Ethernet 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Bad Block 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 15 minutes 276 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Bad Block at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Valid Intervals 96 Ethernet 1 Channel Invalid Intervals 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 1 day 11076 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Bad Block at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Valid Intervals at interval 1 day 30 Ethernet 1 Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day 0 VDSL_CHAN PERF DATA ENTRY FAST Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Invalid Intervals at interval 1 day 0 Console 3 71 Configuring the Switch Monitoring VDSL Performance History This page displays line and channel performance data information during selected 15 minute intervals over the last 24 hours of switch operation and during selected 1 day i
167. ests show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 64 radius server host This command specifies the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server host host_ip_address no radius server host host_ip_address IP address of server Default Setting 10 1 0 1 4 61 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 Console config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 62 Authentication Commands Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no
168. eters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts At the Username prompt enter admin At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password
169. ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Switch unit 1 port Port number Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console 4 96 Rate Limit Commands Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded wit
170. ets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 77 Command Line Interface Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 77 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr community string version 1 2c no snmp server host host addr e host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters e version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps Default Setting Host Address None SNMP Version 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to config
171. ew address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi gt IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address 32168154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 92168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 84 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 167 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 83 Console show ip interface 4 168 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console 3 13 Configuring the Switch Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current ad
172. explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GARP Join Timer The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default 1Q Trunk 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID
173. face Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point 4 134 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible E
174. file Copy Running Config to File File Name confiat Copy to File If you download the startup configuration file under a new file name you can set this file as the startup file at a later time and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 55 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name startup2 0 Startup configuration file name startup startup2 0 Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 59 Console config exit Console treload 4 20 3 17 Configuring the Switch Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch a Reset the switch by selecting Reset i Reset CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 4 20 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 48 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup This switch acts as
175. form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config 4 63 Command Line Interface show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Server IP address 10 1 0 1 Communication key with radius server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network
176. ftware and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows e Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set to any of the following baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none e Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 9 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 8 Basic Configuration Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard a
177. g Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Priority Traffic Type Priority Traffic Type Level Level Network Control Flash Internetwork Control Immediate Critical Priority Flash Override Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that O represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS IP Precedence 2 Co IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Service Value 0 7 0 Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table 3 104 Class of Servi
178. g software 3 15 4 55 DSCP enabling 3 103 4 153 mapping priorities 3 105 4 154 dynamic addresses displaying 3 74 4 123 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 3 83 3 85 4 132 event logging 4 35 F firmware displaying version 3 9 4 54 upgrading 3 15 4 55 G gateway default 3 12 4 168 H hardware version displaying 3 9 4 54 HTTPS 3 28 4 29 HTTPS secure server 3 28 4 29 l IEEE 802 1D 3 76 4 126 IEEE 802 1w 3 76 4 126 IEEE 802 1x 3 33 4 68 IGMP groups displaying 3 113 4 161 Layer 2 3 109 4 158 query 3 109 4 162 query Layer 2 3 110 4 161 snooping 3 109 4 158 snooping configuring 3 110 4 158 ingress filtering 3 95 4 141 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 13 4 83 4 167 setting 2 4 3 11 4 167 IP precedence enabling 3 103 4 152 mapping priorities 3 104 4 153 L link type STA 3 83 3 85 4 134 logging syslog traps 4 38 to syslog servers 4 37 log in Web interface 3 2 Index 1 Index logon authentication 3 24 4 60 RADIUS client 4 61 RADIUS server 4 61 TACACS client 3 25 4 64 TACACS server 3 25 4 64 logon authentication sequence 3 26 4 60 M main menu 3 3 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 mirror port configuring 3 49 4 95 multicast filtering 3 109 4 158 multicast groups 3 113 4 161 displaying 4 161 static 3 113 4 159 4 161 multicast services configuring 3 114 4 159 displaying 3 113 4 161 multicast static router port 3 112 4 165 P pass
179. gent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is assigned by DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch param
180. gs The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Command Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface e STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses 3 81 Configuring the Switch The rules defining port status are 3 82 A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the
181. guration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group 4 162 Multicast Filtering Commands Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 163 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use
182. he configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Interface Line VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configura
183. he spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 129 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP GC 4 130 path cost method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP GC 4 130 transmission limit spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC 4 131 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 4 132 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 132 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 133 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP IC 4 134 spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 135 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 4 135 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree 4 125 Command Line Interface spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between
184. hernet Port Channel 4 86 Interface Commands Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 87 speed duplex 4 85 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negot
185. hout any changes Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 4 97 rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output rate no rate limit input output e input Input rate output Output rate rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 100 Mbps for ports 1 12 1000 Mbps for ports 13 14 with Gigabit modules installed Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config if 4 97 Command Line Interface Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol _LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when ope
186. http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number e When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection e A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 4 x or later versions The following Web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000
187. iate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 87 Command Line Interface Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 86 speed duplex 4 85 flowcontrol 4 88 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Flow control enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half
188. id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 89 4 139 Command Line Interface switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode e trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are sent untagged e hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame t
189. ies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions 4 32 System Management Commands Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 12 show ip ssh 4 34 ip ssh authentication retries Use this command to configure the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 34 disconnect ssh Use this command to terminate a Secure Shell SSH client connection Syntax disconnect ssh connection id connection id The session identifier as displayed in the show ssh command Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 33 Command Line Interface Example Console disconnect ssh 0 Console show ip ssh Use this command to display the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example
190. ifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 IP Address Mode Static IP Address 192 168 1 54 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP 3 12 Basic Configuration CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 84 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 4 167 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 253 4 168 Console config Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a n
191. ign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Note that user names can only be assigned via the CLI Command Attributes e User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 5 e Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged e Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive CLI only Web Click Security Passwords Enter the old password enter the new password confirm it by entering it again then click Apply Passwords Old Password New Password Confirm Password 3 24 User Authentication CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 24 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access _ _ Contro
192. iguration Example Console config dot1ix re authentication Console config dot1x timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 4 71 Command Line Interface Default 60 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout quiet period 350 Console config dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 72 Authentication Commands Example Console config do
193. ill not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address 4 26 System Management Commands Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the Web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console show management all client Management Ip Filter Http Client Start ip address End ip address dy PODS 685215319 192 168 5219 2 192 16821 425 192 168 1 30 Snmp Client Start ip address End ip address de ROD TES A119 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet Client
194. in Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled 3 85 Configuring the Switch e Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP co
195. in three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes e Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting e IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence x 3 103 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 4 152 Console confi
196. ing config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred Community Strings Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users or user groups and set the access level The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Note If you do not intend to utilize SNMP we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings
197. is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1x Private Branch Exchange PBX A telephone exchange local to a particular organisation who use rather than provide telephone services POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from u
198. ise ratio of the VDSL line Downstream Rate Mbps The rate at which data is transmitted from the switch to the CPE Upstream Rate Mbps The rate at which data is transmitted from the CPE to the switch 1 Physical Media Dependent 3 61 Configuring the Switch PBO Indicates the status of the power back off mechanism on off If PBO is enabled the power of transmission from the port will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port Rate Adaptation The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors such as temperature humidity and electro magnetic radiation When rate adaption is enabled the switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for the current conditions e PMS TC2 Status Reed Solomon Errors The number of errors in data that have been corrected by the Reed Solomon code Interleave Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse noise A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the effective bandwidth of the link The degree of interleaving can be increased by increasing the following parameters M The interleaving depth index Range 0 64 Upstream default value 8 Downstream default value 16 The interleaving block length Options 4 or 8 Upstream default value 8 Downstream default valu
199. istrator IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address jp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart client command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If
200. itch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default 3 79 Configuring the Switch e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max
201. ivate VLANs 4 144 pvlan 4 144 show pvlan 4 145 Bridge Extension Commands 4 146 show bridge ext 4 146 Priority Commands 4 147 Priority Commands Layer 2 4 147 switchport priority default 4 147 queue mode 4 148 queue bandwidth 4 149 queue cos map 4 150 show queue mode 4 151 show queue bandwidth 4 151 show queue cos map 4 151 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 4 152 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 152 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 153 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 153 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 154 map ip port Global Configuration 4 155 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 155 show map ip precedence 4 156 show map ip dscp 4 156 show map ip port 4 157 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 158 IGMP Snooping Commands 4 158 ip igmp snooping 4 158 ip igmp snooping vlan static 4 159 ip igmp snooping version 4 159 show ip igmp snooping 4 160 show mac address table multicast 4 161 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 161 ip igmp snooping querier 4 162 ip igmp snooping query count 4 162 ip igmp snooping query interval 4 163 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 163 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 164 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 165 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4 165 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4 166 Contents IP Interface Commands Basic IP Configuration ip address ip default gateway show ip interface show ip redirects ping Appendix A Software Specification
202. ive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device 3 77 Configuring the Switch e Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured e Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time
203. ization requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode and the current SNTP mode i e client or broadcast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast Console 4 47 Command Line Interface clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of time zone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters e hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 1 12 hours e minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes e before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 47 calendar set This command sets the system clock Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year e
204. k from which the priority settings are copied e Destination Interface The port or trunk to which the priority settings are copied Web Click Priority Copy Settings Check the type of priority settings to be copied select the source interface and destination interface then click Copy Settings Copy IP Precedence Priority Settings Enabled Copy DSCP Priority Settings I Enabled Copy IP Port Priority Settings I Enabled Source Interface Port E C Trunk Port Trunk 2 3 Destination Interface 6 8 i 3 108 Multicast Filtering Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time applications such Unicast as videoconferencing or streaming audio A multicast __ Flow server does not have to establish a separate connection with each client It merely broadcasts its service to the network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although a this approach reduces the network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully i pruned at every multicast switch router it passes through C encas to ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts which yp a x subscribed to this service This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management J Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to OCA CD receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports i ae containing hosts
205. key Ethernet Interface e If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group 4 98 Link Aggregation Commands e However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group e Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Value 1 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 13 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LAC
206. l System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols We fal a console 5 Telnet that use software running on a jaj reer central server to control access to me 1 Client atte t t A RADIUS aware or TACACS a aware devices on the network An RADIUS 3 Authentication server challenges client i p TACACS 4 Client responds with proper password or key authentication server contains a sevet 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each
207. level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1 783edd 27d254ca vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 queue cos map 0 0 1 2 queue cos map 1 3 4 queue cos map 2 5 7 efm pbo interface vlan 1 ip address 192 168 1 33 255 255 255 0 f spanning tree mode rstp ip igmp snooping version 1 l no map ip precedence no map ip dsc queue bandwidth 13 5 7 line console line vty end Console 4 52 System Management Commands Related Commands show startup config 4 49 show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 7 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System description 20 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 51 System information System Up time 0 days 1 hours 23 minutes and 44 61 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 30 f 1 47 58 3a Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secu
208. log messages saved to a remote server based on GC 4 38 severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 38 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 39 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 36 clear logging 4 38 4 35 Command Line Interface logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram eve no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset e level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Level Argument Level Description debugging 7 Debugging messages informational 6 Informational messages only notifications 5 Normal but significan
209. loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCPIIP Glossary 5 Glossary Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary VDSL Very high data rate Digital Subscriber Line A family of digital telecommunications protocols designed to allow high speed data communication at data rates from below 1 Mbps to 52 8 Mbps with the corresponding maximum reach ranging from 4500 feet to 100
210. lowed management access 3 23 Security 3 24 Passwords Assigns a new password for the current user 3 24 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 3 25 Telnet Settings Enables to the access the onboard configuration program by a 3 28 VT100 compatible device attached to the server s serial port HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 28 SSH 3 30 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 30 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 3 30 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 3 31 security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1x Port authentication 3 33 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 34 Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 36 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual ports 3 37 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 38 Port 3 39 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 39 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 39 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 42 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 42 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 45 LACP Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 46 Broadcast Control Globally sets the broadcast storm threshold for the switch 3 48 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 49 Navigati
211. ls the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 36 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 41 Command Line Interface Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the s
212. lt Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config 4 152 Priority Commands map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence ip precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence e precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 CoS Value 0 4 2 3 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the
213. ly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Transfer from Server Transfer Configuration File from Server TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 20 Source File Name Istartup3 Destination File Name startup2 startup3 Transfer from Server ansferfrom Sever _ Zi Basic Configuration Setting the Startup Configuration File If you download to a new file name select the new file from the drop down list for Startup Configuration File and press Apply Changes To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Configuration File File Name startup2 gt Apply Changes y g CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 55 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload Copying the Running Configuration to a File You can copy the running configuration to a
214. m 0 5 mm cable may be installed to achieve the maximum distance However typically 24 AWG 100 ohm 0 5 mm wire is better than 26 AWG 100 ohm 0 4 mm wire Note that the distance may be limited by factors such as how the cable is bundled and the interference and noise on the link 6 Public profiles conform to specific standards such as ANSI or ETSI Private profiles do not conform to these standards Example Console config Console config efm profile global S1 16 16 Console config Related Commands efm profile 4 103 efm profile Use this command to assign profiles for speed to a specific VDSL port on the switch Syntax efm profile profile name profile name Name of the profile Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Assigns a profile to a specific VDSL port For details of the these profiles see efm profile global on page 4 102 4 103 Command Line Interface Example The following example assigns EFM profile S1 16 16 to VDSL port 1 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm profile S1 16 16 Console config if Related Commands efm profile global 4 102 efm reset Use this command to reset the switch VDSL chipset or if a CPE is connected the CPE VDSL chipset Syntax efm reset local remote e local Resets the CO side VDSL chipset for a VDSL port remote Resets the CPE side VDSL chipset of a VDSL
215. m to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database 4 37 Command Line Interface Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config logging trap This command limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use the no form to return the remote logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax no logging trap eve level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 36 Default Setting Level 3 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear logging This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mod
216. mand enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command e The SNTP time query method is set to client mode when the first sntp client command is issued However if the sntp broadcast client command is issued then the no sntp broadcast client command must be used to return the switch to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast Console Related Commands sntp server 4 45 sntp poll 4 46 sntp broadcast client 4 47 show sntp 4 47 sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server ip7 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 45 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based o
217. mation the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Customer Premises Equipment CPE Terminating equipment such as terminals phones and routers supplied by the phone company installed at customer sites and connected to the phone company network Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and addi
218. ments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices 1 3 Introduction Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than ha
219. mmand sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config 4 124 Spanning Tree Commands show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 126 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP mode GC 4 126 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4 127 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4 128 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4 128 spanning tree priority Configures t
220. mpatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Priority Path Cost Admin Edge Port Port STA State i 249 1 200000000 Fast Forwarding Forwarding 128 100000 Auto z F Enabled F Enabled Admin Link Type Migration Trunk 1 2 Discarding fe fiooooo Auto g Enabled I Enabled 3 Discarding fize 100000 Auto gt I Enabled I Enabled 4 Discarding 128 100000 Auto z F Enabled F Enabled 5 Discarding fe fiocooo ao F Enabled I Enabled CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 84 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 129 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 131 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 134 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 132 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 4 135 Console config if VLAN Configuration Overview In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure
221. mple shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 58 4 57 Command Line Interface dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file e config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte diag _0060 Boot Rom image N 111360 run _ 01642 Operation Code N 1074304 run 0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 Factory Default_Config cfg Config File N 2574 startup Config File Y 2710 Total free space 0 Console 4 58 Flash File Commands whichboot This comm
222. n Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Port Capability 100BASE TX 10 Mbps half duplex 10 Mbps full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex 100 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled Module Port Capability 1000BASE T SX LX LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Protocol Status Enabled Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Weighted Round Robin Queue 0 1 1 4 2 16 3 64 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Settings IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Disabled BOOTP Disabled DNS Server Lookup Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Enabled System Log
223. n and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 84 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics SEEE TEE xes Unit E Mode Active 7 F Linkup J Link Down I Home VS 4512 Manager aA System aS SNTP SNMP System Name A peny Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 13 4 a0 VSL Location a E Address Table a Spanning Tree amp J VLAN amp Priority E IGMP Snooping Contact System Up Timej0 days 0 hours 1 minutes and 21 89 seconds Connect to textual user interface Apply Rever Help Configuration Options Configurable
224. n can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled 802 1x Max Request Count Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Timeout for Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the dot1X Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds e Timeout for Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds Timeout for TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds e authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type Note that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly configured for dot1x to function properly Options radius CLI only Web Select Security 802 1x Configuration Enable dot1x globally for the switch modify any of the parameters required and then click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X Re authentication o Enable 802 1x Max Request Count 1 10 2 Timeout For Quiet Period 1 65535 60 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 1 65535 3600 seconds Timeout For T
225. n the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 44 sntp poll 4 46 show sntp 4 47 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 44 4 46 System Management Commands sntp broadcast client This command synchronizes the switch s clock based on time broadcast from time servers using the multicast address 224 0 1 1 Use the no form to disable SNTP broadcast client mode Syntax no sntp broadcast client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config sntp broadcast client Console show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchron
226. n this may only be set to Local indicating that the line configuration applies to the line connection from the switch to the CPE Coding Specifies the VDSL coding type used on this line The types of code are 1 Others none of the following 2 Multiple Carrier Modulation 3 Single Carrier Modulation Type Defines the type of VDSL physical line by defining whether and how the line is channelized The types of line are 1 No channels exist 2 Only fast channels exist 3 Only interleaved channels exists 4 Either fast or interleaved channels exist 5 Both fast and interleaved channels exist 3 65 Configuring the Switch e Config Profile In this version only DEFVAL is displayed In future versions a drop down list of all configurable VDSL profiles will be displayed in this field Alarm Config Profile The alarm profile is pre configured to send trap messages via SNMP protocol to register errors on the VDSL line Web Click VDSL Line Configuration Select the line from the drop down list and click Query VDSL Line Configuration Line 1 Side Local Query Coding 3 Type 4 Config Profile DEFVAL Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL a CLI Use the show controllers efm line table command Example Console show controllers efm line table 4 117 VDSL_LINE ENTRY Ethernet 1 Line Coding 3 Ethernet 1 Line Type 4 Ethernet 1 Line Config Profile DEFVAL Ethernet 1 Line Alarm Config Pr
227. n up link ethernet 1 13 14 down link ethernet 1 1 8 Console config end Console show pvlan Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch Syntax show pvlan Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 13 Ethernet 1 14 Down link port Ethernet 1 1 Ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 1 3 Ethernet 1 4 Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 4 145 Command Line Interface Bridge Extension Commands This section describes how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Command Function Mode Pag e show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4 146 show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 88 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 10 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled GMRP Disabled Console 4 146 Prio
228. nd Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 4 9 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 10 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 11 exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 4 12 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of LC 4 12 failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC 4 13 after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted LC 4 14 and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 14 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 15 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4 16 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 16 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 4 17 These commands only apply to the serial port line This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Line Interface Command Usage
229. nd operational status of an NE PE 4 93 This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port channel channel id Value 1 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting None 4 84 Interface Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e 100f
230. ne Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs ooo0ao0o0o 0 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs oooo0 0 SNMP logging disabled SNMP ip filter group Console 4 81 Command Line Interface DHCP Commands These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client You can configure any VLAN interface to be automatically assigned an IP address via DHCP DHCP Client Command Function Mod Pag e e ip dhcp client identifier Specifies the DHCP client identifier for this switch IC 4 82 ip dhcp restart client Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4 83 ip dhcp client identifier This command specifies
231. nfiguring the Switch Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet VS 4512 Manager System Name vs451 2 Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 13 4 Location R amp D Contact Geof System Up Time 0 days 6 hours 25 minutes and 47 7 seconds uel Connect to textual user interface CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname VS 4512 4 23 Console config snmp server location R amp D 4 77 Console config snmp server contact Geoff 4 77 Console config exit Console show system 4 53 System description VS 4512 System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 13 4 System information System Up time 0 days 6 hours 7 minutes and 9 51 seconds System Name VS 4512 System Location R amp D System Contact Geoff MAC address 00 01 00 02 00 03 Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable POST result DUMMY EGS rogei finne ekee PASS UART LOOP BACK Test PASS DRAM TEST secs crave Bae hop Geis sees Bis PASS TAME TES tens sakes iera ee PASS RIG TOS Bis See wiieits isis EDERRA PASS PCI Device TOS te rid raat ances a PASS Firmware DownloadPASS Switch Int Loopback test
232. ng VDSL Interface Information on page 3 66 Syntax show controllers efm line table Command Mode Privileged EXEC 4 117 Command Line Interface Example Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Console show controllers efm line table VDSL_LINE_ ENTRY Line Coding 3 Line Type 4 Line Config Profile DEFVAL Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL VDSL_LINE_ ENTRY Ethernet 1 12 Line Coding 3 Ethernet 1 12 Line Type 4 Ethernet 1 12 Line Config Profile DEFVAL Ethernet 1 12 Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL Console Parameter Description Line Coding Specifies the VDSL coding type used on this line 1 Others none of the following 2 Multiple Carrier Modulation 3 Single Carrier Modulation Line Type Defines the type of VDSL physical line by defining whether and how the line is channelized 1 No channels exist 2 Only fast channels exist 3 Only interleaved channels exists 4 Either fast or interleaved channels exist 5 Both fast and interleaved channels exist Config Profile In this version only DEFVAL is displayed Alarm Config Profile The alarm profile is pre configured to send trap messages via SNMP protocol to register errors on the VDSL line show controllers efm phy table This command displays physical interface information for the selected VDSL port For details see Displaying VDSL Interface Information on page 3 66 Syntax show controllers efm phy
233. ng the Web Browser Interface Menu Description Page Rate Limit 3 50 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 50 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 50 Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 50 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 50 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 51 VDSL 3 56 Global Configuration Batch assigns profiles for speed and distance range to all the 3 56 VDSL ports on the switch Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 58 Port Link Status Displays information on the link status of individual VDSL ports 3 61 Port Ethernet Statistics Displays Ethernet statistics for individual switch VDSL ports and 3 63 linked CPE Ethernet ports Line Configuration Configures line connection settings 3 65 Interface Information Displays physical interface and channel interface information 3 66 Performance Monitor Displays line and channel performance data information since 3 69 Information the switch was last reset during the current 15 minute interval and during the current day Performance Monitor History Displays line and channel performance data information during 3 72 selected 15 minute intervals over the last 24 hours of switch operation and during selected 1 day intervals from the cur
234. ng vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 4 159 Command Line Interface Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 110 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console 4 160 Multic
235. note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard e The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk 3 44 Port Configuration Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage e When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types depending on the manufacturer s implementation However note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel compatible statically configured i active To avoid creating a loop in the network be links sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk
236. nt PRAHA RAHE and a remote RADIUS 1 Client attempts to access a switch port i i 2 Switch sends client an identity request authentication SEIVEF to RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information verify user identity and server 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server r 5 Authentication server challenges client access rights When a 6 Client responds with proper credentials client i e Supplicant 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method can be MD5 TLS Transport Layer Security TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security or other The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the
237. nt access using IEEE 802 1x Command Group Function Page Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4 60 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4 61 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS server 4 64 Port Security Configures secure addresses fora pot 466 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1x 4 68 Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4 60 authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet 4 60 Authentication Commands e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and pa
238. ntervals from the current day to 30 days ago Command Attributes 3 72 Line Select the VDSL line from the drop down list Channel Select Slow or Fast from the drop down list Side This only displays Local All information displayed is for data transmission from the switch to the CPE Line Performance Data History Information For the 15 Min Interval column interval 1 is the most recent interval interval 96 is 24 hours ago For the 1 Day Interval column interval 1 is the most recent day interval 30 is 30 days ago Loss of Frame LOF Number of seconds that there was loss of framing in the indicated time interval Loss of Signal LOS Number of seconds that there was loss of signal in the indicated time interval Loss of Power Number of seconds that there was loss of power in the indicated time interval Loss of Link Number of seconds that there was loss of link in the indicated time interval Errored Second Number of errored seconds in the indicated time interval An errored second is a one second interval containing one or more CRC anomalies or one or more LOS or LOF defects Severely Errored Second Number of severely errored seconds in the indicated time interval An errored second is a one second interval containing one or more one or more CRC anomalies or one or more LOS or LOF defects Unavailable Second Count of unavailable seconds in the indicated time interval
239. o specific interfaces on the switch page 3 114 3 109 Configuring the Switch Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly e IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes e IGM
240. o tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 65 Command Line Interface Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with radius server green Server port number 49 Console Port Security Commands These commands can be used to disable the learning function or manually specify secure addresses for a port You may want to leave port security off for an initial training period i e enable the learning function to register all the current VLAN members on the selected port and then enable port security to ensure that the port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 67 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 122 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 123 4 66 Authentication Commands port securi
241. ode Privileged Exec Example Console sh queue mode Wrr status Enabled Console show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting None 4 151 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01 2 Priority Queue 0 0 0 Console 345 A 2 W OV 7 2 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service mapping GC 4 152 map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 153 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 154 show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 156 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 156 map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Defau
242. ofile DEFVAL VDSL_LINE_ ENTRY Ethernet 1 12 Line Coding 3 Ethernet 1 12 Line Type 4 Ethernet 1 12 Line Config Profile DEFVAL Ethernet 1 12 Line Alarm Config Profile DEFVAL Console Displaying VDSL Interface Information This Web screen displays physical interface information and channel interface information for a selected VDSL line Command Attributes e Line Select the VDSL line from the drop down list e Channel Select Slow or Fast from the drop down menu The switch uses the slow channel for data that requires a very low error rate in transmission The switch uses the fast channel for data such as voice video signals that require fast delivery but for which a small error rate is acceptable e Side This only displays Local All information displayed is for data transmission from the switch to the CPE 3 66 VDSL Configuration Physical Interfaces Information Serial Number A number given by the manufacturer to the item produced This only displays on the CPE side Vendor ID The name of the manufacturer of this switch Version Number The number of the current hardware Current Signal to Noise Ratio Margin To ensure a stable link you should add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal to noise ratio SNR For details see VDSL Port Configuration on page 3 58 Range 0 9 dBm Default 0 dBm Current Attenuation The attenuation of the signal Units db Current Sta
243. ole ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode Dhcp Console Related Commands ip address 4 167 4 83 Command Line Interface Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN switchport interface interface Command Function Mode Page interface cones an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 4 84 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 85 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 4 85 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 86 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in IC 4 87 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 88 combo forced mode Force port type selected for combination ports IC 4 89 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 89 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4 89 packet rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 90 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 4 91 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 4 92 counters show interfaces Displays the administrative a
244. ollisions 0 Internal mac receive errors Packets 491 2104 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 855411 Broadcast pkts 38 Multi cast pkts Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 0 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 5 123 Packet size 256 to 511 octets Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 483 142 Related Commands show controllers ethernet controller 4 109 show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 93 Command Line Interface Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 2 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold Enabled 650 packets second Lacp status Disabled ngress rate limit disable 100M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 100M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid ngress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbid
245. ommands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 153 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 154 show map ip port Use this command to show the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 157 Command Line Interface Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Related Commands map ip port Interface Configuration 4 155 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Command Groups Function Pag e IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 4 158 sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4 161 Static Multica
246. onsole config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 159 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 163 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config 4 164 Multicast Filtering Commands Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 159 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Pag e ip igmp snooping vian Adds a multicast router port GC 4 165 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 166 mrouter ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id mrouter interface
247. ontrollers efm admin 4 112 show controllers efm status 4 114 show controllers efm channel performance 4 117 4 116 VDSL Commands show controllers efm channel performance This command displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL line For details see Displaying VDSL Interface Information on page 3 66 Syntax show controllers efm channel performance vtu r vtu c fast slow interface 15 minutes 1 day e vtu r VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the remote end of the line e vtu r VTU Transceiver at the near central end of the line e fast Fast channel slow Slow channel interface Ethernet interface to display e unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number 15 minutes Performance at intervals of 15 minutes 1 day Performance at intervals of 1 day Command Mode Privileged EXEC Example Console show controllers efm channel performance vtu c fast 1 1 1 day VDSL_CHAN 1DAY INTERVAL ENTRY Ethernet 1 1 Channel Interval Number at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Interval monitoring at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Interval Bad Blocks at interval 1 day 0 Console Related Commands show controllers efm actual 4 111 show controllers efm admin 4 112 show controllers efm status 4 114 show controllers efm line table This command displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL line For details see Displayi
248. oopback RDL tests the link between the switch and the CPE by sending out and returning data through the CPE over the VDSL link Example The following example shows how to enable disable RDL on VDSL port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm rdl Console config if no efm rdl Console config if 4 105 Command Line Interface efm interleave This command sets the interleave parameters for the selected VDSL port Syntax efm interleave downstream M value upstream M value downstream I value upstream value no efm interleave e M value M is the interleaving depth index Range 0 64 e I value is the interleaving block length Range 4 or 8 Default Setting e M The interleaving depth index Upstream default value 8 Downstream default value 16 e The interleaving block length Upstream default value 8 Downstream default value 8 Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Interleaving improves Reed Solomon error correction when there is pulse noise A greater degree of interleaving will provide more protection against pulse noise but will increase transmission delay and reduce the effective bandwidth of the link The degree of interleaving can be increased by increasing M or l Example The following example configures VDSL port 1 with e M downstream value 16 Upstream value 8 e downstream value 8 Upstream value 8 Console config Con
249. ords of login logging Show the setting of login mac address table Set configuration of the address table map Map priority port Characteristics of the port pvlan nformation of private VLAN queue nformation of priority queue radius server Radius server information running config The system configuration of running snmp SNMP statistics spanning tree Specify spanning tree ssh Secure shell startup config The system configuration of starting up system nformation of system tacacs server Login by tacacs server users Display information about terminal lines version System hardware and software status vian Switch VLAN Virtual Interface Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counter status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Entering Commands Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset t
250. orts Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then manually assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging tagged frames VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware tagged untagged frames TETTEY frames a VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame 3 87 Configuring the Switch Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resource
251. orts with their mapped class of service queues IP Port to set a new IP port number e Class of Service to set a new class of service for an IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 3 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Port Priority Status and then select Enabled Enabled Click Priority IP Port Priority Select the port or trunk To add an IP port type the port number in the IP Port box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box then click Apply To delete an IP port setting select the entry in the Current IP Port Table then click Remove IP Port IP Port Priority Interface G Port C Trunk 7 Select IP Port Priority Table IP Port Number TCP UDP Class of Service Value 0 7 Remove IP Port 3 107 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example shows IP Port 80 mapped to CoS value 0 for ethernet port 1 Console config map ip port 4 155 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 155 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 4 157 TCP port mapping status enabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 23 0 Eth 1 5 80 0 Eth 1 5 1020 6 Console Copy Priority Settings In the Copy Settings page you can copy the priority settings from a selected port or trunk to another selected port or trunk Command Attributes Source Interface The port or trun
252. ote that the distance may be limited by factors such as how the cable is bundled and the interference and noise on the link 6 Public profiles conform to specific standards such as ANSI or ETSI Private profiles do not conform to these standards Command Attributes Profile Name The name for the specific set of communication parameters Profile Type Public profiles are those that meet specific standards e g ETSI or ANSI Private profiles do not meet these standards The ports on a VDSL switch can be assigned the same or different profiles Downstream Rate Rate of data transmission from the switch to the CPE Upstream Rate Rate of data transmission from the CPE to the switch Web Click VDSL Global Configuration and select a profile from the drop down list VDSL Global Configuration Profile Select Default S3000AG RI 51 16 16 52 16 16A hd CLI This example shows how to configure all VDSL ports on the switch to profile S1 16 16 Example Console config Console config efm profile global S1 16 16 4 102 Console config 3 57 Configuring the Switch VDSL Port Configuration You can enable disable a selected port enable disable Remote Digital Loopback RDL set the optimal transmission rate and configure a profile for the selected port Command Attributes e Active Status Check this box to enable the selected port e RDL Check this box
253. outer This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router 3 112 Multicast Filtering Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vian1 Unit Portl1 rr Fon Add VLANID 1 z Remove Porn fi z Trunk gt CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 165 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 166 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 1 Static Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Multicast Grou
254. output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if interface ethernet 1 3 queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 3 5 7 for queues 0 3 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration 4 148 Priority Commands Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue
255. ower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 130 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if 4 131 Command Line Interface spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 131 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the
256. p Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service 3 113 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 12 Multicast IP Address 2241 112 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User CLI The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping 4 161 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Console Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 110 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command
257. p to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration ISNTP Client I Enable SNTP Broadcast client E Enable SNTP Poll Interval 16 16284 16 SNTP Server pooo booo foon CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and as an SNTP broadcast client Console config sntp client 4 44 Console config sntp poll 16 4 46 Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 45 Console config sntp broadcast client 4 47 Console config Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC e Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC e Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Configuring the Switch Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for yo
258. parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply or Apply Changes button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply or Apply Changes Refresh Immediately updates values for the current page Apply Sets specified values to the system Apply Changes Sets specified values to the system Navigating the Web Browser Interface Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The items in the Mode drop down menu are Item Description Values Active Displays the link status of the ports Green Link Up Blue Link Down Duplex Displays the duplex mode of the ports Green Disabled Blue Enabled Switch Information Shows port flow control status Green Half Duplex Blue Full Duplex
259. ped with the switch and for the their upstream and downstream data rates Examples This example displays VDSL profiles and link status for the switch s VDSL ports Interface Port Profile Ethernet 1 1 Default Ethernet 1 2 S1 16 16 Ethernet 1 3 Default Ethernet 1 4 Default Ethernet 1 5 Default Ethernet 1 6 Default Ethernet 1 7 Default Ethernet 1 8 Default Ethernet 1 9 Default Ethernet 1 10 Default Ethernet 1 11 Default Ethernet 1 12 Default Console Console show controllers efm profile mapping Status Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active This example displays profile names type Public or Private and downstream and upstream rates for all the VDSL profiles configured on this switch Console show controllers efm profile names Profile Name Type Downstream Rate Mbps Default Public 1 20 A1 020AG R1 Public 7 56 A2 020AG R1 Public 10 80 A3 010AG R1 Public 17 28 A4 010AG R1 Public 25 92 S1 030AG R1 Public 7 56 S2 030AG R1 Public 10 80 S3 000AG R1 Public 17 28 S1 16 16 Private 16 74 S2 16 16A Private 16 74 A1 34 11 Private 33 75 A2 34 11A Private 33 75 A3 25 3 Private 25 38 A4 45 5 Private 44 55 A5 50 7 Private 50 49 A6 22 3A Private 22 55 A7 40 5A Private 40 91 A8 46 7A Private 46 44 TLAN Private 17 01 Max Rate Private 71 28 Console Upstream Rate Mbps 1 40 2 43 2 43 3 78 4 72 7 56 10 40 16 47 16 20 16 20 11 34 11
260. plink ports Glossary 4 Glossary Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Protocol STP A technology that checks your network for any
261. port e snr Displays the signal to noise ratio SNR on the VDSL port txpower Displays the remote transmit power dBm Hz on the VDSL port e usrserrs Displays the upstream Reed Solomon errors on the VDSL port Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged EXEC Command Usage SNR and Reed Solomon error information display the quality of the VDSL link The SNR represents the upper limit of received signal to noise ratio that the switch will handle before disconnecting from the remote CPE The Reed Solomon errors show the number of errors detected and corrected in the data being received on and transmitted from the VDSL ports Reed Solomon errors are the result of noise exceeding the noise margin Example The following example displays the current values of the VDSL link on VDSL switch port 2 Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual dsrserrs Downstream Reed Solomon errors 0 Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual link Link status Down Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual rxpower Local receive power 26 00 dBm Hz Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual snr SNR 27 00 dB Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual txpower Remote transmit power 89 70 dBm Hz Console show controller efm Ethernet 1 2 actual usrserrs Upstream Reed Solomon errors 0 Console 4 111 Command Line Interface Related Commands show controllers efm admin 4 11
262. port speed and duplex mode Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control 3 42 Note Web Port Configuration Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation ena
263. pped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes e WRR Setting Table Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 255 CLI shows Queue ID Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling WRR Setting Table Weight Value 1 255 lel 3 102 Class of Service Configuration CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config queue bandwidth 2 8 16 128 4 149 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 4 151 Queue ID Weight 0 2 1 8 2 16 3 128 Console Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may conta
264. r thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped 1 2 Description of Software Features Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports one trunk with two Gigabit optional module ports Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Stati
265. rating at full duplex Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 84 configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 99 Dynamic Configuration Command lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC Ethernet 4 99 Trunk Status Display Command show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 91 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 99 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have two Gigabit optional module ports e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP system priority e Ports must have the same port admin
266. re server port 443 POST result UART LOOP BACK Test PASS DRAM TE SEs sisi Sidkae Gates goede dats PASS TIST TES ope8 piak ca ae pee dees PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS PCT Device 2 Tests mursin sane PASS Switch Int Loopback test PASS Done All Pass Console show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None 4 53 Command Line Interface Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 00 00 1 vty 0 admin 0 04 37 TO 1 0 19 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 9 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unitl Serial number 21111111111 Hardware version ROA Number of ports 224 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit id pal Loader version Se AR i e 2 Boot rom version F205
267. re up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only access private read write access Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write x E CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 76 Console config 3 21 Configuring the Switch Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes
268. ream default value 8 Downstream default value 16 The interleaver block length Options 4 or 8 Upstream default value 8 Downstream default value 8 3 59 Configuring the Switch Web Click VDSL Port Configuration Select a port from the drop down list and click Select VDSL Port Configuration Interface Port X Select Active Status F Active f RDL I Enabled Profile S1 16 16 gt PBO F Enabled Rate Adaptation Enabled DownStream Value 0 9 dBm Noise Margin UpStream Value 0 9 dBm Downstream M Valuex 0 64 Downstream Valuex 4 or 8 Interleave Upstream M Valuex 0 64 yyy Upstream Value 4 or 8 E CLI The following examples show how these features are configured in the CLI Examples The following example disables VDSL port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if efm shutdown 4 104 Console config if The following example shows how to enable disable RDL on VDSL port 1 config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 config if efm rdl 4 105 config if no efm rdl config if Conso Conso Conso Conso ooo The following example assigns efm profile S1 16 16 to VDSL port 1 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if efm profile S1 16 16 4 103 Console config if The following example enables power back off for port 1 Console config Console config interface ethernet 1 1
269. red Transmissions 0 FCS Errors 0 0 Carrier Sense Errors 3 64 VDSL Configuration CLI Use the show interfaces counters command Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 11 4 92 Ethernet 1 11 Iftable stats Octets input 19648 Octets output 714944 Unitcast input 0 Unitcast output 0 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 10524 Broadcast input 136 Broadcast output 0 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 nternal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 734720 Packets 10661 Broadcast pkts 136 Multi cast pkts 10525 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 9877 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 93 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 691 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console VDSL Line Configuration Command Attributes Line Select the VDSL line for configuration from the drop down list Local Remote In this versio
270. rent day to 30 days ago Address Table 3 73 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 73 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3 74 Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 75 Spanning Tree 3 76 STA 3 76 Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 77 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3 79 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 81 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 81 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 84 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 84 Configuring the Switch Menu Description Page VLAN 3 86 802 1Q VLAN 3 86 Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3 88 Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or 3 89 not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 91 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 92 Static Membership Configures membership type for interfaces including tagged 3 93 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 94 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3 94 Private VLAN 3 96 Private VLAN Status Enables or disables
271. rface Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Command Group Function Pag e Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4 22 User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4 24 Web Server Enables management access via a Web browser 4 28 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 31 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 35 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 40 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 4 44 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 4 49 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Pag e prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4 23 hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 23 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 77 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 77 4 22 System Management Commands prompt
272. rface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 100M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 100M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console Not supported in the current version 3 99 Configuring the Switch Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background Spare default Best Effort Ex
273. rface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses e Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Only 3 73 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port l 7 C Trunk MAC Address KKK VLAN fi gt Add Static Address Remove Static Address CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 122 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inboun
274. rity Commands Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 4 147 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP tags to class of 4 152 service values Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mod Page e switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 147 queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 4 148 Round Robin WRR queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues GC 4 149 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 4 150 show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 151 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4 151 show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 151 show interfa
275. roring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports 1 Gigabit trunk using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Protocol Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 1 1 Introduction Feature Description Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based VLANs provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the
276. rt interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line console 1 line vty end Console Related Commands show running config 4 51 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 51 Command Line Interface Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information e SNMP community strings e Users names access levels and encrypted passwords e VLAN database VLAN ID name and state e VLAN configuration settings for each interface e Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs e Spanning tree settings e Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show running config building running config please wait snmp server community private rw snmp server community public ro l username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password
277. rt Configuration 1000BASE T 10 100 1000 Mbps half full duplex 1000BASE SX LX 1000 Mbps full duplex Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q Class of Service Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Precedence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional Features BOOTP client CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Software Specifications Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9
278. s Software Features Management Features Standards Management Information Bases Appendix B Troubleshooting Glossary Index 4 166 4 166 4 167 4 168 4 168 4 169 4 169 A 1 A 2 A 2 A 3 Chapter 1 Introduction The switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment The switch uses four frequency bands two downstream and two upstream for VDSL lines These frequency bands conform to ANSI Plan 998 Details of the frequency bands are given in the table below Key Features Feature Description 4 Band VDSL Total Bandwidth 11 1 MHz Bandwidth Allocation Downstream 1 0 9 3 75 MHz Downstream 2 5 2 8 5 MHz Upstream 1 3 75 5 2 MHz Upstream 2 8 5 12 MHz Configuration Backup Backup to TFTP server and Restore Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP Community strings IP address filtering Port IEEE 802 1x MAC address filtering DHCP Client Supported Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mir
279. s among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame on
280. s reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 13 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 12 4 13 Command Line Interface databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per charac
281. smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show bridge ext Bridge extend information calendar Date information controllers Interface controller status dot1x Show 802 1x content history Information of history interfaces Information of interfaces ip IP information line TTY line information log Show the rec
282. sole config Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command Command Line Interface Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into
283. sole config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if efm interleave 16 8 8 8 Console config if end Console show controllers efm status link Ethernet 1 1 Interface Link SNR dB RS Errs Interleaver DS1 DS2 US1 US2 DS M DS I US M US I PBO Ethernet 1 1 Up 43 0 35 0 45 0 43 0 0O 16 8 8 8 on Console Related Commands efm noise margin 4 107 show controllers efm status 4 114 4 106 VDSL Commands efm noise margin This command sets the noise margin of the selected VDSL port Use the no form of this command to disable this feature Syntax efm noise margin downstream noise margin upstream noise margin no efm noise margin downstream noise margin A measure of the amount of noise that the downstream VDSL line can tolerate before the signal is affected Range 0 9 upstream noise margin A measure of the amount of noise that the upstream VDSL line can tolerate before the signal is affected Range 0 9 Default Setting 0 disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage When rate adaptation is enabled see efm rate adapt on page 4 108 the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR is an indicator of link quality The switch itself has no internal functions to ensure link quality To ensure a stable link you should add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal to noise ratio SNR The table below lists theoretical minimum SNR s for the VDSL profiles configurable on this switch Profile Name Theoretic
284. ssh timeout ip ssh authentication retries disconnect ssh show ip ssh show ssh Event Logging Commands logging on logging history logging host logging facility logging trap clear logging show logging SMTP Alert Commands logging sendmail host logging sendmail level logging sendmail source email logging sendmail destination email logging sendmail show logging sendmail Time Commands sntp client sntp server sntp poll sntp broadcast client show sntp clock timezone calendar set show calendar Contents 4 24 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 30 4 31 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 33 4 34 4 34 4 35 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 38 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 41 4 42 4 42 4 43 4 43 4 44 4 44 4 45 4 46 4 47 4 47 4 48 4 48 4 49 Contents vi System Status Commands show startup config show running config show system show users show version Flash File Commands copy delete dir whichboot boot system Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence authentication login RADIUS Client radius server host radius server port radius server key radius server retransmit radius server timeout show radius server TACACS Client tacacs server host tacacs server port tacacs server key show tacacs server Port Security Commands port security 802 1x Port Authentication authentication dot1x default dot1x default dot1x max req dot1x port control dot1x operation mode dot1x re authenticate dot1x r
285. ssword pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 24 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 61 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 62 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 62 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 63 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication GC 4 63 requ
286. st Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4 165 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Pag e ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 158 ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4 159 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 159 show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4 160 show mac address table Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 161 multicast ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping 4 158 Multicast Filtering Commands Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ip address interface vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 jp address IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snoopi
287. system Default Setting None 4 49 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage 4 50 Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs Routing protocol configuration settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet System Management Commands Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest enable password level 15 0 super snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree mst configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 lacp partner admin key 0 spanning tree edge po
288. t These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch 3 111 Configuring the Switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN ID 1 gt Multicast Router List Unit Portl1 Static CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 165 VLAN M cast Router Port Type Eth 1 1 Static Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached r
289. t 1 1 Loss of Link at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Errored Second at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Severely Errored Second at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Unavailable Second at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Line Initialization Attempts at interval 15 minutes o Ethernet 1 Valid Intervals at interval 15 minutes 96 Ethernet 1 nvalid Intervals at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Time Elapsed at interval 1 day 10861 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Frame at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Signal at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Loss of Power at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 1 Loss of Link at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Errored Second at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Severely Errored Second at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Unavailable Second at interval 1 day o Ethernet 1 Line Initialization Attempts at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Valid Intervals at interval 1 day 30 Ethernet 1 1 nvalid Intervals at interval 1 day o VDSL_CHAN PERF DATA ENTRY SLOW Ethernet 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Bad Block 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 15 minutes 276 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Bad Block at interval 15 minutes 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Valid Intervals 96 Ethernet 1 Channel Invalid Intervals 0 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Time Elapsed at interval 1 day 11076 Ethernet 1 Channel Current Fixed Octets at interval 1 day 0 Ethernet 1 Ch
290. t condition such as cold start warnings 4 Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return errors 3 Error conditions e g invalid input default used critical 2 Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted alerts 1 Immediate action needed emergencies 0 System unusable Note There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 4 36 System Management Commands logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no for
291. t mask entries currently configured for SNMP access e IP address Specifies a new IP address to add to the IP Filter List e Subnet Mask Specifies a single IP address or group of addresses If the IP is the address of a single management station set the mask to 255 255 255 255 Otherwise an IP address group will be specified by any other mask Web Click SNMP IP Filtering To add a client enter the new address the subnet mask for a node or an address range and then click Add IP Filtering Entry SNMP IP Filtering none IP Filter List IP Address Subnet Mask Add IP Filtering Entry Remove IP Filtering Entry xi 3 23 Configuring the Switch CLI This example allows SNMP access for a specific client Console config snmp ip filter 10 1 2 3 255 255 255 255 4 80 Console config User Authentication Use the Passwords or RADIUS TACACS menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch Passwords menu or you can use a remote access authentication server based on the RADIUS TACACS protocol You can also use IEEE 802 1x port authentication to control access to specific ports dot1X menu Configuring the Logon Password The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore ass
292. t one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 143 show interfaces status vian Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 4 91 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 4 93 interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vian name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters 4 143 Command Line Interface Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Console
293. t utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 3 53 Configuring the Switch Parameter Description 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte
294. t1lx timeout tx period 300 Console config show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Displays the global port access control parameters that can be configured for this switch as described in the preceding pages including reauth enabled page 4 71 reauth period page 4 72 quiet period page 4 71 tx period page 4 72 and max req page 4 69 It also displays the following global parameters which are set to a fixed value including the following items supp timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 70 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays detailed port access control settings for each interface as described in the preceding pages including administrative status for port access control Max request page 4 69 Quiet period page
295. table vtu r vtu c interface e vtu r VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the remote end of the line e vtu c VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the near central end of the line e interface Ethernet interface to display e unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number 4 118 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Example VDSL Commands Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Console 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Console show controllers efm phy table vtu c 1 1 VDSL_PHYS_ ENTRY Serial Number Vendor ID Version Current Current Current Current Current Current Number Signal to Noise Ratio Margin Attenuation Status Output Power Attainable Rate Line Rate ACCTON 91 45 54 0 12 1350000 1350000 show controllers efm channel table This command displays channel interface information for the selected VDSL port For details see Displaying VDSL Interface Information on page 3 66 Syntax show controllers efm channel table vtu r vtu c interface e vtu r VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the remote end of the line e vtu c VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit at the near central end of the line interface Ethernet interface to display unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged EXEC Example Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Console 1 1
296. tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time e Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Not supported in the current version 3 89 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 Up Time at Creation dO h 0 min 23 s Status Permanent _ Egress Ports Uniti Port Uniti Pong Untagged Ports Uniti Poni Unit Port2 Unit Pon3 Unit Port4 Unit PortS Unit Port Unit Port Unit Ports x Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Not supported in the current version e Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows
297. taining all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 94 Command Attributes 3 92 VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page VLAN Configuration Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN n
298. tate Machine State Connecting Reauth Count 3 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 0 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Port Name Status Mode 1 disabled ForceAuthorized 2 disabled ForceAuthorized 25 disabled ForceAuthorized 26 enabled Authentication Commands Authorized n a n a yes yes 4 75 Command Line Interface SNMP Commands SNMP Commands control access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers Command Function Mode Page snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to GC 4 76 SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 77 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 77 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4 78 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 4 79 notifications snmp ip filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access to GC 4 80 the switch via SNMP show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 4 81 snmp server community This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw
299. tatic Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 C Trunk z Query Member Non Member vlan 1 E CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types and ingress filtering Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All 3 94 VLAN Configuration Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs
300. ter e 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 14 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity 4 14 Line Commands Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode
301. the DCHP client identifier for the current interface Use the no form to remove this identifier Syntax ip dhcp client identifier text text hex hex no ip dhcp client identifier e text A text string Range 1 15 characters hex The hexadecimal value Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage This command is used to include a client identifier in all communications with the DHCP server The identifier type depends on the requirements of your DHCP server Example Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip dhcp client identifier hex 00 00 e8 66 65 72 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart client 4 83 4 82 DHCP Commands ip dhcp restart client This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if exit Cons
302. the Private VLAN feature 3 97 Private VLAN Link Status Configures ports as downlink or uplink ports Traffic from 3 97 downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink ports Priority 3 98 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 98 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 98 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 3 100 Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not implemented NA Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 3 101 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 102 P Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority or disables 3 103 DSCP Priority Status both P Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the precedence tag to 3 104 a class of service value P DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 3 105 DSCP tag to a class of service value P Port Priority Status Enables disables Port Priority status 3 107 P Port Priority Maps IP ports TCP UDP ports to the switch s 4 traffic class 3 107 queues Copy Settings Allows you to copy the priority settings from a selected port or 3 108 trunk to another selected port or trunk Basic Configuration Menu Description Page IGMP Snooping 3 109 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for multicast 3 110 query Multicast Router
303. the VLAN interface members CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 Status Ports Channel groups Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Ethl 5 Eth1 6 Ethl 7 Ethl 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Console 3 90 VLAN Configuration Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list e Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned
304. then SNMP management access to the switch is disabled To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP it is recommended that you change the default community strings 2 6 Basic Configuration To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config snmp server community private Console config Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver and community string is the string associated with that host Press lt Enter gt 2 In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command Type snmp server enable traps type where type is ei
305. ther A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R D B al x a Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated ort R a oP A D ji x y NU These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amo
306. ther authentication or link up down Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console Initial Configuration Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file
307. this company com SMTP source email address bill this company com SMTP status Enable Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP or by using information broadcast by local time servers Command Function Mode Pag e sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 44 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 45 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 46 sntp broadcast client Accepts time from any time broadcast server GC 4 47 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 4 47 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 48 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 48 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE PE 4 49 sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 44 System Management Commands Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup e g 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This com
308. ticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 24 3 26 User Authentication Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local z RADIUS Settings Server IP Address horor Server Port Number heiz Secret Text String E Number of Server Transmits Timeout for a reply sec i TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 49 Secret Text String CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config
309. tics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management statio
310. tion 802 1X Statistics Por as Query Rx EXPOL Stat O Rx EAP LenError 0 IRx EAPOL Logoff OlRx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSre 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total OlTx EAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Respid OlTx EAP Regd 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Refresh CLI This example displays the 802 1x statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 73 Eth 1 4 Rx EXPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 100BASE TX Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down 3 39 Configuring the Switch e Max MAC Count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 20 addresses Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control c
311. tion modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin Command Line Interface The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 25 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use th
312. tional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication standard Glossary 1 Glossary GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general metho
313. to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 e Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 3 80 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State Enabled Spanning Tree Type RSTP Priority 0 61440 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 2 seconds Maximum Age 6 40 120 seconds Forward Delay 4 30 15 seconds Advanced Path Cost Method Long Transmission Limit 1 10 3 B K CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol and then configures the STA parameters Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age 38 4 126 4 129 4 128 4 127 4 128 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 130 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 4 130 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Displaying Interface Settin
314. to enable Remote Digital Loopback RDL Remote Digital Loopback RDL tests the link between the switch and the CPE by sending out and returning data through the CPE over the VDSL link see efm rdl on page 4 105 Default Disabled e Profile Configures a profile for the selected port e PBO Enables disables power back off on the selected port If PBO is enabled the power of transmission from the port will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the signal successfully reaches the receive port e Rate Adaptation The data rate on a VDSL line can be affected by factors such as temperature humidity and electro magnetic radiation When rate adaption is enabled the switch will determine the optimal transmission rate for the current conditions e Noise Margin When rate adaptation is enabled the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR is an indicator of link quality The switch itself has no internal functions to ensure link quality To ensure a stable link you should add a margin to the theoretical minimum Signal to noise ratio SNR The table below lists theoretical ninimum SNR s for the VDSL profiles configurable on this switch Profile Name Theoretical Minimum Signal to Noise Ratio dB Default 10 Not Used 10 Not Used A1 020AG R1 17 Not Used 14 Not Used A2 020AG R1 20 Not Used 14 Not Used A3 010AG R1 23 10 17 Not Used A4 010AG R1 26 20 20 Not Used 1 030AG R1 17 Not Used 20 10 2 0
315. to the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes e VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Only Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 14093 Maximum Number of Supported VLANS 255 l4 3 88 VLAN Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 146 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN
316. troller specific VDSL port show controllers efm Displays the current values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL PE 4 111 actual port show controllers efm Displays the administrative settings of the VDSL link on a specific PE 4 112 admin VDSL port show controllers efm Displays information about the Ethernet in the First Mile EFM PE 4 112 profile profiles available on the switch and how they are assigned to the VDSL ports show controllers efm Displays the VDSL link statistics and profile information on a PE 4 114 status specific VDSL port show controllers efm Displays the connected CPE Ethernet mode PE 4 115 remote ethernet mode show controllers Displays the noise margin for the switch s VDSL ports PE 4 116 efm noise margin show controllers efm Displays the channel performance for the channels in a VDSL PE 4 117 channel performance line show controllers efm Displays the channel performance for the channels ina VDSL PE 4 117 line table line show controllers efm Displays physical interfaces information for the selected VDSL PE 4 118 phy table port show controllers efm Displays channel interface information for the selected VDSL port PE 4 119 channel table show controllers efm Displays line and channel performance data information during PE 4 120 4 101 Command Line Interface efm profile global Use this command to batch assign profiles for speed to all the VDSL ports on the swit
317. ts on the switch and connected CPEs Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays 4 122 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 125 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 4 137 groups also enables or configures private VLANs Bridge Extension Display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB and 4 146 configure forbidden VLANs Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 4 147 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies 4 158 ports attached to a multicast router IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 166 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations NE Normal Exec PE Privileged Exec LC Line Configuration VC VLAN Database Configuration GC Global Configuration IC Interface Configuration Line Commands Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Comma
318. ts only SSH Version 1 5 Command Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server feature on the switch Default Enabled e SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt e Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply SSH Settings SSH Serer Status Enabled SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 100 SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 5 3 30 User Authentication CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disabled this connection Console config ip ssh server Console config ip ssh timeout 100 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 Console config Console show ip ssh Information of secure shell SSH status enable SSH authentication timeout 100 SSH authentication retries 5 Console show ssh Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state
319. tus This displays defects in the VDSL line In the current version this always displays 0 which means no defects Current Output Power The total output power transmitted on this line Units 0 1 dBm Current Attainable Rate The maximum line data rate using the current profile Unit Bits per second Current Line Rate The current line data rate Unit Bits per second e Channel Interface Information Interleave Delay Transmission delay caused by the use of interleaving Units Milliseconds CRC Block Length Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC is a number derived from and transmitted with data frames in order to detect corruption of data Current Transmit Rate The current rate of data transmission Current Transmit Slow Burst Protect Actual level of impulse noise burst protection for an interleaved slow channel This parameter is not applicable to fast channels For fast channels a value of zero is returned Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction Actual Forward Error Correction FEC redundancy related overhead for a fast channel This parameter is not applicable to an interleaved slow channel For interleaved channels a value of zero is returned Not supported in the current version 3 67 Configuring the Switch Web Click VDSL Interface Information Select Line and Channel from the drop down lists and click Query VDSL Interface Information Line 1 z Chanel Slow
320. ty This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count e action Response to take when port security is violated e shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 Default Setting Status Disabled Action None Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e If you enable port security the switch will stop dynamically learning new addresses on the specified port Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted To use port security first allow the switch to dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on a port for an initial training period and then enable port security to stop address learning Be sure you enable the learning function long enough to ensure that all valid VLAN members have been registered on the selected port
321. ues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes e WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 4 16 and 64 for queues 0 through 3 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or Wrr then click Apply 3 101 Configuring the Switch Queue Mode Queue Mode Wrr CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 151 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 151 Queue mode strict Console Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 100 the traffic classes are ma
322. ull Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 4 85 Command Line Interface Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default soeed duplex setting is 100half for 1OOBASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 86 capabilities 4 87 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Et
323. unt of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media 3 83 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Spanning Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port Tree STA Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Port Role Member 1 Enabled Forwarding 7 200000 32768 0 0030F 1552000 128 24 Fone Disabled Root 2 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 1440 0 0000E9313131 128 2 Patia Enabled Disabled Point to 3 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 3 Point Enabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 4 Pante Enabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 1285 g Enabled Disabled a CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 13
324. ur time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Current Time Jan 1 05 43 00 2001 Name Dhak a Hours Q 23 fe Minutes 0 59 fo Direction C before ute after utc CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 4 48 Console Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as HP OpenView Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings trap functions and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections 3 20 Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings You may configu
325. uration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 5 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 21 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands 4 19 Command Line Interface Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config
326. ure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 10 password thresh 4 12 4 11 Command Line Interface exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration 4 12 Line Commands Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold i
327. ure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications 4 78 SNMP Commands Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 79 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure traps link up down Keyword
328. urity Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Console 4 100 VDSL Commands VDSL Commands These commands are used to to configure and display communication parameters for VDSL and Ethernet ports on the switch and connected CPEs current performance the current 15 minute interval and during the current day Command Function Mod Page e efm profile global Batch assigns profiles for speed to all the VDSL ports on the GC 4 102 switch efm profile Assigns profiles for speed to individual VDSL ports IC 4 103 efm reset Resets the switch VDSL chipset or if a CPE is connected the IC 4 104 CPE VDSL chipset efm shutdown Disables the VDSL chipset transmitter of an EFM port that is not PE 4 104 being used efm rdl Enables disables Remote Digital Loopback RDL mode IC 4 105 efm interleave Sets the interleave parameters for the selected port IC 4 106 efm noise margin Sets the noise margin of the selected VDSL port IC 4 107 efm rate adapt Enables and disables the rate adaption feature on the selected IC 4 108 VDSL port efm pbo Enables and disables power back off on the selected VDSL port IC 4 109 show controllers Displays the Ethernet link transmit and receive statistics on a PE 4 109 ethernet con
329. urrently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member e Creation2 Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 1 Port Information only 2 Trunk Information only Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Admin Oper Max Speed Flew Trunk PortName Type MAC Duplex Control Autonegotiation Status Status Member Count Status Status 1 10085 Enabled Up o 100full None Enabled 2 100Base Enabled Down o 100full None Enabled 3 vag Enabled Down 0 100fu None Enabled 4 ee Enabled Down O 100full None Enabled 5 ae a Enabled Down 0 100fu None Enabled Command Attributes CLI Basic information Port type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 100BASE TX e MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 11 Configuration e Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see
330. us Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member C Cc ala aa d 93 oJ NI oJ ans Jon D93 10 gt gt IAlaAlaAlaAlaAlalalalalalalaloa POA AA APaAlaAlaAlalalalala gt 19 Trunk Uplink Downlink None xl 3 97 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures ports 13 and 14 as uplink ports and ports 1 8 as downlink ports Console config Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 13 14 down link ethernet 1 1 8 4 144 Console config end Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 13 Ethernet 1 14 Down link port Ethernet 1 1 Ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 1 3 Ethernet 1 4 Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console Console config Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged
331. us to enabled then click Apply Broadcast Control Threshold 500 262143 500 packets sec Broadcast Control Status Enabled j 3 48 Port Configuration CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for port 2 This threshold will then apply to all ports with broadcast storm control enabled Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 84 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 89 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 4 89 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold Enabled 600 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 100M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 100M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the eto Gest target port and study the traffic crossing the Source Single source port in a completely uno
332. values PE 4 34 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 35 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 4 53 ip ssh server Use this command to enable the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server 4 31 Command Line Interface Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands Event Logging Commands 4 35 ip ssh timeout Use this command to configure the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specif
333. vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config 4 165 Command Line Interface show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console
334. ving to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System
335. w Burst Protect 0 Ethernet 1 1 Channel Current Transmit Fast Forward Error Correction 0 Console 3 68 VDSL Configuration VDSL Performance Monitor Information This screen displays line and channel performance data information since the switch was last reset during the current 15 minute interval and during the current day Command Attributes Line Select the VDSL line from the drop down list Channel Select Slow or Fast from the drop down menu The switch uses the slow channel for data that requires a very low error rate in transmission The switch uses the fast channel for data such as voice video signals that require fast delivery but for which a small error rate is acceptable Side This only displays Local All information displayed is for data transmission from the switch to the CPE Line Performance Data Information Loss of Frame LOF Number of seconds that there was loss of framing since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval Loss of Signal LOS Number of seconds that there was loss of signal since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval Loss of Power Number of seconds that there was loss of power since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval Loss of Link Number of seconds that there was loss of link since the switch was last reset or in the indicated time interval Errored Second Number of Errored Seconds since th
336. w controllers efm admin 4 112 show controllers efm profile 4 112 show controllers efm status 4 114 show controllers efm remote ethernet mode 4 115 show controllers efm noise margin 4 116 show controllers efm channel performance 4 117 show controllers efm line table 4 117 show controllers efm phy table 4 118 show controllers efm channel table 4 119 show controllers efm current performance 4 120 Address Table Commands 4 122 mac address table static 4 122 clear mac address table dynamic 4 123 show mac address table 4 123 mac address table aging time 4 124 show mac address table aging time 4 125 Spanning Tree Commands 4 125 spanning tree 4 126 spanning tree mode 4 126 spanning tree forward time 4 127 spanning tree hello time 4 128 spanning tree max age 4 128 spanning tree priority 4 129 spanning tree pathcost method 4 130 spanning tree transmission limit 4 130 spanning tree cost 4 131 spanning tree port priority 4 132 spanning tree edge port 4 132 spanning tree portfast 4 133 spanning tree link type 4 134 spanning tree protocol migration 4 135 show spanning tree 4 135 VLAN Commands 4 137 Editing VLAN Groups 4 137 vlan database 4 137 vlan 4 138 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 139 interface vlan 4 139 switchport mode 4 140 switchport acceptable frame types 4 140 switchport ingress filtering 4 141 switchport native vlan 4 142 switchport allowed vlan 4 142 Displaying VLAN Information 4 143 show vlan 4 143 viii Contents Configuring Pr
337. will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Timeout for Quiet Period Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Timeout for Re authentication Period Indicates the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Timeout for TX Period The time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet e Supplicant timeout The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP request e Server timeout The time the switch waits for a response from the authentication server RADIUS to an authentication request e Re authentication Max Count The number of times the switch will attempt to re authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized Web Click Security 802 1x Information 802 1X Information 802 1X Re authentication Disabled 802 1X Max Request Count 2 Timeout For Quiet Period 60 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 3600 seconds Timeout For Tx Period 30 seconds Supplicant Timeout 30 seconds Server Timeout 1966050 seconds I Re authentication Max Count 2 3 34 User Authentication CLI This example shows the default protocol settings for 802 1x For a description of the additional entries displayed in the CLI See show dot1
338. witch Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None 4 42 System Management Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 43 Command Line Interface Example SMTP servers 192 168 1 19 Console Console show logging sendmail SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted
339. with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission 3 98 Class of Service Configuration Command Attributes Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port The CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Port Priority Configuration Port Default Priority Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 0 o7 4 2 P o 4 3 B 7 4 P en 4 0 o7 4 zl n amp CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config inte
340. word line 4 11 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 3 24 4 24 path cost 3 77 method 3 80 4 130 STA 3 77 4 130 port authentication 3 33 4 68 port priority configuring 3 98 4 147 default ingress 3 98 4 147 STA 4 132 port security configuring 3 31 4 66 port statistics 3 51 4 92 ports autonegotiation 3 43 4 86 broadcast storm threshold 3 48 4 89 capabilities 3 43 4 87 duplex mode 3 42 4 85 flow control 3 42 4 88 forced selection on combo ports 3 41 speed 3 42 4 85 ports configuring 3 39 4 84 ports mirroring 3 49 4 95 Index 2 priority default port ingress 3 98 4 147 problems troubleshooting C 1 protocol migration 3 86 4 135 Q queue weights 3 102 4 149 R RADIUS logon authentication 4 61 rate limits setting 3 50 4 97 remote logging 4 38 restarting the system 3 18 4 20 RSTP 3 76 4 126 global configuration 3 77 4 126 S secure shell 3 30 4 31 Secure Shell configuration 3 30 4 32 4 33 serial port configuring 4 9 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 20 community string 3 21 4 76 enabling traps 3 22 4 79 filtering IP addresses 3 23 4 80 trap manager 3 22 4 78 software displaying version 3 9 4 54 downloading 3 15 4 55 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 30 4 32 4 33 STA 3 76 4 125 edge port 3 83 3 85 4 132 global settings configuring 3 79 4 126 4 130 global settings displaying 3 77 4 135 interface settings 3
341. ws classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address e mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 e sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 123 Command Line Interface Command Usage e The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types e Learned Dynamic address entries e Permanent Static entry e Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit O means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 e0 29 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time This co
342. x on page 73 Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 11 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 12 enabled Single Host Auto 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 12 Status Unauthorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 00 Current Identifier 0 Authenticator State Machine State Connecting Reauth Count 3 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 0 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Authorized n a n a yes yes 3 35 Configuring the Switch Configuring 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server The configuration options for parameters are described in this section Command Attributes e 802 1x Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Timeout for Re authentication Period Re authenticatio
343. x Period 1 65535 30 nee 3 36 User Authentication CLI This enables re authentication and sets all of the global parameters for 802 1x Console config dot1ix re authentication Console config dot1lx max req 5 Console config dot1lx timeout quiet period 40 Console config dot1lx timeout re auth 5 Console config dot1lx timeout tx period 40 Console config authentication dotix default radius Console config Configuring Port Authorization Mode When dot1x is enabled you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode configured for each port Command Attributes e Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 20 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Authorized Yes
344. xample Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration Console config if show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 135 Command Line Interface Command Usage e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every interface in the tree e Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface e For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 79 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 81 Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode RSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Priority 132768 Bridge Hello Time sec 22 Bridge Max Age sec 220 Bridge Forward Delay sec 215 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Designated Root 32768 000087654321 Current root port Current root
345. xample Console show controllers ethernet controller ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 1 2 EFM PHY on Switch Transmit 9671624 Bytes Transmitted 8487 Frames Transmitted 0 Pause frames Single Collision Frames Multiple collisions Late collisions Excessive collisions Deferred frames Carrier sense errors ooo0o0o0 0 Receive 1406434 Bytes Received 17551 Frames Received 0 Broadcast frames Pause frames Alignment errors Collisions and Runts Oversize frames FCS errors oo0oo0oo0oo EFM MAC on CPE Transmit Bytes Transmitted Frames Transmitted Pause frames Single Collision Frames Multiple collisions Late collisions Excessive collisions Deferred frames Carrier sense errors oooooCcocCc0o oO Receive Bytes Received Frames Received Broadcast frames Pause frames Alignment errors Collisions and Runts Oversize frames FCS errors ooooCoo0c0 oO Console Related Commands show interfaces counters 4 92 4 110 VDSL Commands show controllers efm actual Use this command to display the current values of the VDSL link on a specific VDSL port Syntax show controllers efm interface id actual dsrserrs usrserrs txpower rxpower snr link e interface id ID of the VDSL port e dsrserrs Displays the downstream Reed Solomon errors on the VDSL port e link Displays the VDSL link status of the VDSL port rxpower Displays the local receive power dBm Hz on the remote customer premises equipment CPE
346. xample The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 4 89 Command Line Interface Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number e port channel channel id Value 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for
347. y no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config 4 129 Command Line Interface spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method e long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 131 takes precedence over port priority page 4 132 Example
348. ypes 4 140 switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types e all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged e tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 140 VLAN Commands Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 140 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames e If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled
349. ze Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh CLI This example shows statistics for port 12 le Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 12 Ethernet 1 12 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 3 55 Configuring the Switch VDSL Configuration You can configure and display communication parameters for VDSL and Ethernet ports on the switch and connected CPEs VDSL Global Configur

Accton Technology VS4512 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents